02.06.2013 Views

SINUMERIK 840D/810D ShopMill

SINUMERIK 840D/810D ShopMill

SINUMERIK 840D/810D ShopMill

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Description of Functions 12.2001 Edition<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Manufacturer/Service Documentation


<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Description of Functions<br />

Valid for<br />

Control Software version<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong> 6<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>E (export version) 6<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong> powerline 6<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>E powerline 6<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong> 4<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>E (export version) 4<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong> powerline 4<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>E powerline 4<br />

12.01 Edition<br />

Hardware 1<br />

Installation and Start-Up 2<br />

Supplementary Conditions 3<br />

PLC Program 4<br />

Signal Description 5<br />

Machine Data 6<br />

Reserved Functions 7<br />

Tools 8<br />

Tool Management 9<br />

Measuring Cycles 10<br />

Network Link 11<br />

Access Protection 12<br />

Miscellaneous 13<br />

Abbreviations A<br />

References B<br />

Index C


<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> R Documentation<br />

Printing history<br />

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.<br />

The status of each edition is shown by the code in the “Remarks” columns.<br />

Status code in the “Remarks” column:<br />

A ..... New documentation.<br />

B ..... Unrevised reprint with new Order No.<br />

C ..... Revised edition with new status.<br />

If factual changes have been made on the page within the same<br />

software version, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the<br />

header on that page.<br />

Edition Order No. Remarks<br />

10.97 6FC5 297-2AD80-0BP0 A<br />

11.98 6FC5 297-2AD80-0BP1 C<br />

03.99 6FC5 297-5AD80-0BP0 C<br />

08.00 6FC5 297-5AD80-0BP1 C<br />

12.01 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP0 C<br />

This manual is included in the documentation available on CD-ROM (DOCONCD)<br />

Edition Order No. Remarks<br />

01.02 6F C5 298- 6CA 00- 0B G 2 C<br />

Registered Trademarks<br />

SIMATICr, SIMATIC HMIr, SIMATIC NETr, SIROTECr, <strong>SINUMERIK</strong>r and SIMODRIVEr are trademarks of<br />

Siemens. Other names used in this publications may be trademarks of their respective owners and their<br />

use by third parties may constitute a violation of copyright.<br />

Further information is available on the Internet under:<br />

http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik.<br />

This publication was produced with Interleaf V7.<br />

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its<br />

contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders<br />

will be liable for damages. All rights, including riths created by patent<br />

grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.<br />

E Siemens AG, 1997 -2001. All rights reserved<br />

Order No. 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP0<br />

PrintedinGermany<br />

Other functions not described in this documentation might be<br />

executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an<br />

obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when<br />

servicing.<br />

We have checked that the contents of this publication agree with the<br />

hardware and software described here. Nevertheless, differences<br />

might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are<br />

completely identical. The information given in this publication is<br />

reviewed at regular intervals and any corrections that might be<br />

necessary are made in the subsequent printings. Suggestions for<br />

improvement are welcome at all times.<br />

Subject to changes without prior notice.<br />

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft


Preface<br />

Structure of<br />

documentation<br />

Target group<br />

Objective<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong><br />

powerline<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong><br />

powerline<br />

Standard scope<br />

The <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> documentation is divided into 3 different levels:<br />

General Documentation<br />

User Documentation<br />

Manufacturer/Service Documentation<br />

This document is intended for the manufacturers of vertical machining centers<br />

or universal milling machines incorporating <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>.<br />

The Installation and Start-up Guide provides you with all the relevant information<br />

required to configure, install and start-up <strong>ShopMill</strong>.<br />

Note<br />

This Description of Functions is valid for <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 6.2 with:<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong> (SW 4.3 and later)<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong> (SW 6.3 and later)<br />

Improved-performance variants <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong> powerline and <strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>E powerline will be available from 09.2001. For a list of available powerline<br />

modules, please refer to the following Hardware Description:<br />

References: /PHD/, Configuring Manual <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>.<br />

Improved-performance variants <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong> powerline and <strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>810D</strong>E powerline will be available from 12.2001. For a list of available powerline<br />

modules, please refer to the following Hardware Description:<br />

References: /PHC/, Configuring Manual <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>.<br />

This document provides information about the control system design and the<br />

interfaces of the individual components. It also describes the start-up and installation<br />

procedure for <strong>ShopMill</strong> with <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>.<br />

For detailed information about individual functions, function assignment and<br />

performance data of individual components, please refer to the appropriate document<br />

for the subject concerned (e.g. manuals, function descriptions etc.).<br />

User-oriented activities such as the creation of part programs and control operating<br />

procedures are described in detail in separate documents.<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

v


Preface<br />

Searching aids<br />

Notes<br />

Warnings<br />

vi<br />

!<br />

!<br />

12.01<br />

Further descriptions of tasks to be performed by the machine tool manufacturer<br />

are also available for the standard <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>. We may refer to<br />

them in this manual if appropriate.<br />

In addition to the table of contents, we have provided the following information<br />

in the appendix for your assistance:<br />

1. Index of abbreviations<br />

2. List of references<br />

3. Index<br />

For a complete list and description of the <strong>ShopMill</strong> alarms, please refer to<br />

References: /BAS/, <strong>ShopMill</strong> Operator’s Guide.<br />

The <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong> alarms are also listed in<br />

References: /DA/, Diagnostics Guide.<br />

For further useful information on start-up and troubleshooting, please refer to<br />

References: /FB/, D1, “Diagnostics Tools”.<br />

The following symbols with special significance are used in the documentation:<br />

Note<br />

This symbol appears in this document to draw your attention to information<br />

relevant to the subject in hand.<br />

The following warnings with varying levels of severity are used in this document:<br />

Danger<br />

This symbol indicates that death, grievous injury or substantial property damage<br />

will occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.<br />

Warning<br />

This symbol indicates that death, grievous injury or substantial property damage<br />

may occur if the appropriate precautions are not taken.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

!<br />

Caution<br />

This symbol used with de safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous<br />

situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.<br />

Caution<br />

This symbol used without de safety alert symbol indicates a potentially<br />

hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.<br />

Notice<br />

Technical information<br />

Trademarks<br />

Notations<br />

This symbol used without de safety alert symbol indicates a potentially situation<br />

which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.<br />

IBM is a registered trademark of the International Business Corporation.<br />

MS-DOS and WINDOWST are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.<br />

The following notations and abbreviations are used in this document:<br />

S PLC interface signals --> IS “Signal name” (signal data)<br />

Example:<br />

-- NST “base_sig.reset” (DB82, DBX4.0) i.e. the signal is stored in data<br />

block 82, data byte 4, bit 0.<br />

S Machine data --> MD: NUMBER, MD_NAME (English designation)<br />

S Setting data --> SD: NUMBER, SD_NAME (English designation)<br />

S The symbol “¹” means “corresponds to”.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

Preface<br />

vii


Preface<br />

viii<br />

Notes<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


Contents<br />

1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13<br />

1.1 Hardware assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13<br />

1.2 Examples for assigning the machine control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15<br />

2 Installation and Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17<br />

2.1 Preconditions for software start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19<br />

2.2.1 Starting up <strong>ShopMill</strong> on a PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19<br />

2.2.2 Starting up <strong>ShopMill</strong> on a PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22<br />

2.2.3 NC start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27<br />

2.2.4 PLC start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29<br />

2.3 Series start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31<br />

3 Supplementary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33<br />

4 PLC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35<br />

4.1 Structure of the PLC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35<br />

4.2 Example for OB1 and OB100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36<br />

4.3 Overview of blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39<br />

4.3.1 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39<br />

4.3.2 Data blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40<br />

4.4 Description of blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41<br />

4.4.1 <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41<br />

4.4.2 <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42<br />

4.4.3 Diagnostics function for start-up purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44<br />

4.5 Standard interface signals for/from <strong>ShopMill</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45<br />

5 Signal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47<br />

5.1 Overview of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47<br />

5.1.1 Signals to <strong>ShopMill</strong> (input signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47<br />

5.1.2 Signals from <strong>ShopMill</strong> (output signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48<br />

5.1.3 Diagnostics buffer signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49<br />

5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51<br />

5.2.1 Signals to <strong>ShopMill</strong> (input signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51<br />

5.2.2 Signals from <strong>ShopMill</strong> (output signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60<br />

5.2.3 Description of diagnostics buffer signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67<br />

6 Machine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69<br />

6.1 NC machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72<br />

6.2.1 Overview of machine data display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72<br />

6.2.2 Description of display machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<br />

6-74<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

ix


Contents<br />

x<br />

12.01<br />

7 Reserved Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87<br />

8 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89<br />

8.1 Tool-changing cycle adapting to the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90<br />

8.2 Manual tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92<br />

8.3 Switching on spindle and coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93<br />

8.4 Activate tool-specific M functions 1...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94<br />

8.5 Modify texts for tool-specific functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96<br />

8.5.1 PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96<br />

8.5.2 PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98<br />

9 Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101<br />

9.1 Overview of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-101<br />

9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104<br />

9.2.1 Start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104<br />

9.2.2 Entering the NC machine data for tool management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105<br />

9.2.3 Description of the NC machine data for tool management . . . . . . . . . 9-107<br />

9.2.4 Creating and loading the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-112<br />

9.2.5 Entering display machine data for tool management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-118<br />

9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119<br />

9.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119<br />

9.3.2 Start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120<br />

9.3.3 Description of blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121<br />

9.3.4 Signal description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-123<br />

9.4 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130<br />

9.4.1 Example 1: Machine with disk-type magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130<br />

9.4.2 Example 2: Machine with chain magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-133<br />

9.5 Configuring the operator interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-136<br />

9.5.1 To modify the standard lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-136<br />

9.5.2 Defining an additional list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140<br />

10 Measuring Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-143<br />

10.1 Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-143<br />

10.2 Probe connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-144<br />

10.3 Functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-146<br />

10.4 Start-up sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-148<br />

10.4.1 Start-up flowchart for probe activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-148<br />

10.5 Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-151<br />

10.5.1 Machine data for adapting the probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-151<br />

10.5.2 Display machine data for measuring cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-152<br />

11 Network Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-157<br />

11.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-157<br />

11.2 Linking Windows network drives to <strong>ShopMill</strong> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-158<br />

11.2.1 PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-158<br />

11.2.2 PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-159<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch<br />

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-161<br />

12.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-161<br />

12.2 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-163<br />

12.3 Keyswitch positions (DB10, DBX56.4 to 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-164<br />

12.4 Machine data for protection levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-165<br />

13 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-167<br />

13.1 Configuring the customer booting display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-167<br />

13.1.1 PCU 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-167<br />

13.1.2 PCU 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-168<br />

13.2 Configuring the user screenform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-169<br />

13.2.1 Linking user-configured cycles into the machining plan . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-170<br />

13.2.2 Incorporating own measuring cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-171<br />

13.3 Cylinder surface transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-172<br />

13.3.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-172<br />

13.3.2 Example of how to set an axis configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-173<br />

13.4 Swivel heads and tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-176<br />

13.5 Multiple clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-178<br />

13.6 ISO dialects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-179<br />

13.7 Spindle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-180<br />

13.8 Automatically generated programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-181<br />

13.9 <strong>ShopMill</strong> Open (PCU 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-182<br />

13.9.1 Basic menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-182<br />

13.10 Cycles/measuring cycles support in the G code editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-183<br />

13.11 User status display (PCU 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-184<br />

13.12 OP hotkeys, PLC keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-186<br />

A Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-187<br />

B References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-191<br />

C Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-203<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

Contents<br />

xi


Contents<br />

xii<br />

Notes<br />

12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


Hardware<br />

1.1 Hardware assembly<br />

System assembly<br />

Table 1-1 Basic components<br />

Hardware assembly for <strong>ShopMill</strong> is as standard for <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>.<br />

References: /PHC/, <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>, Configuring Manual<br />

/IAC/, <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>, Installation & Start-Up Guide<br />

/PHD/, <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>, Configuring Manual<br />

NCU 561.2-573.3<br />

/IAD/, <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/SIMODRIVE 611D,<br />

Installation & Start-Up Guide<br />

Basic components Order number Remarks<br />

CCU1 (<strong>810D</strong>) 6FC5410-0AY01-0AA0 Export version<br />

CCU3 (<strong>810D</strong>) 6FC5410-0AY03-1AA0 Export version<br />

NCU571.3 (<strong>840D</strong>) 6FC5357-0BB11-0AE1<br />

NCU572.3 (<strong>840D</strong>) 6FC5357-0BB22-0AE0<br />

NCU573.3 (<strong>840D</strong>) 6FC5357-0BB33-0AE2<br />

Table 1-2 Operator components<br />

Operator components Order number Remarks<br />

OP010 operator panel 6FC5203-0AF00-0AA0<br />

OP010C operator panel 6FC5203-0AF01-0AA0<br />

OP010S operator panel 6FC5203-0AF04-0AA0<br />

OP015 operator panel 6FC5203-0AF03-0AA0<br />

PCU 20 with system software 6FC5210-0DF00-0AA0 166 MHz, 16 MB<br />

PCU 50 with system software 6FC5210-0DF02-0AA0 333 MHz, 128 MB<br />

19¨ machine control panel 6FC5203-0AD10-0AA0 Standard layout/US layout<br />

Key cap for<br />

19¨ machine control panel<br />

6FC5148-0AA1j-0AA0 j = 4: 16, transparent with stickers<br />

j = 3: 90, gray<br />

Full OP032S CNC keyboard 6FC5203-0AC00-1AA0 Standard/US layout<br />

Machine control panel OP032S 6FC5203-0AD10-1AA0 Standard/US layout<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

1<br />

1-13


1Hardware<br />

1.1 Hardware assembly<br />

Table 1-2 Operator components<br />

Key cap for OP032S CNC full<br />

keyboard and OP032S machine<br />

control panel<br />

Mini handheld unit 6FX2007-1AD00<br />

1-14<br />

6FC5248-0AA02-0AA0 Standard/US layout<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

1Hardware<br />

1.2 Examples for assigning the machine control panel<br />

1.2 Examples for assigning the machine control panel<br />

Example for<br />

assignment of the<br />

MCP 19¨<br />

10<br />

¡<br />

©<br />

To facilitate start-up, you can call module FC90 in OB1 with the following key<br />

assignments:<br />

S for 19” machine control panel with source file FC90_MCP19<br />

S for the machine control panel of the OP032S with source file FC90_OP32S<br />

Keys assigned by <strong>ShopMill</strong> via the DB82 are grayed out.<br />

Symbols are available in the keyboard cover set (see Section 1.1 “Hardware<br />

Assembly”) for keys ¡ to ¨.<br />

[.]<br />

10<br />

1000<br />

1<br />

100<br />

10000<br />

11 12<br />

Fig. 1-1 19¨ machine control panel<br />

¢<br />

£<br />

¤<br />

¥<br />

¦ § ¨<br />

X<br />

Y<br />

4 5 6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

- +<br />

¡ Jog mode MANUAL<br />

© Automatic mode AUTO<br />

¢ Tool Offset -- Tool operating area<br />

Z<br />

9<br />

% %<br />

£ Program Manager -- Directory operating area<br />

¤ Alarm -- Alarms operating area<br />

¥ Program -- Program operating area<br />

¦ Spindle rotation counter-clockwise (M4) and Spindle Start<br />

§ SpindleStop(M5)<br />

¨ Spindle rotation clockwise (M3) and Spindle Start<br />

Reset<br />

11 Cycle Stop<br />

12 Cycle Start<br />

1-15


1Hardware<br />

1.2 Examples for assigning the machine control panel<br />

Example for<br />

assignment of the<br />

MCP for OP032S<br />

1-16<br />

1<br />

2<br />

11<br />

10<br />

12<br />

Fig. 1-2 Machine control panel for OP032S<br />

¡ Jog mode MANUAL<br />

7 8 9<br />

© Automatic mode AUTO<br />

¦ Spindle rotation counter-clockwise (M4) and Spindle Start<br />

§ SpindleStop(M5)<br />

¨ Spindle rotation clockwise (M3) and Spindle Start<br />

Reset<br />

11 Cycle Stop<br />

12 Cycle Start<br />

Note<br />

12.01<br />

The operating areas for tool, directory, alarms and program can be selected via<br />

hard keys on the CNC keyboard for OP032S.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

J


Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.1 Preconditions for software start-up<br />

Data<br />

communication<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

software package<br />

For data communication, you require:<br />

S Hardware<br />

-- Programming device, e.g. a PG 740 or a PC with MPI module<br />

-- Cable for RS-232 PG/PC-NC (Order No.: 6FX2 002-1AA01-0BF0)<br />

-- Cable for MPI bus (Order No.: 6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0)<br />

-- PCMCIA card (for series start-up via PCMCIA card)<br />

This PCMCIA card can be used for the NCU/CCU or for the PCU. The<br />

PCMIA card is referred to by the following terms for easier distinction in<br />

the start-up sections:<br />

-- for the NCU/CCU “NC card”<br />

-- for the PCU “PC card”<br />

S Software<br />

-- SIMATIC Step7, SW 4 and later (see SIMATIC catalog for order number)<br />

-- PCIN (Order No. see Catalog NC Z)<br />

-- SINUCOPY-FFS for PC card or NC card<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> software package to be installed comprises the following:<br />

S System disks (one each for PCU20 and PCU 50)<br />

S Application disks (for PCU 20 only)<br />

S <strong>ShopMill</strong> toolbox (cycles, machine data, setting data)<br />

S <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC Toolbox (PLC programs)<br />

The floppy disks are available on the <strong>ShopMill</strong> CD-ROM. The files must be<br />

copied to the hard disk of a PC/PG. The procedure for further installation of the<br />

software on PCU and NC/PC is described in the following sections on installation<br />

and start-up.<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> CD-ROM also includes the NC standard software releases for<br />

Sinumerik <strong>810D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>. These can be loaded onto a PCMIA card via SINUCO-<br />

PY-FFS.<br />

Note<br />

The exact contents of the <strong>ShopMill</strong> CD-Rom can be found in file siemensd.txt<br />

(German) or siemense.txt (English).<br />

You can find a compatibility list in file compat.xls.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

2<br />

2-17


2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.1 Preconditions for software start-up<br />

System disks<br />

Application disks<br />

Toolbox disks<br />

2-18<br />

12.01<br />

The system disks contain the system software for the two PCUs; for PCU 50 in<br />

5 language, for PCU 20 in the languages ENGLISH and GERMAN, where<br />

ENGLISH is the foreground language.<br />

Note<br />

Before installing the contents of the system disks, please read the “SW/HW replacement”<br />

description in the Installation and Start-Up Guide for the <strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>810D</strong> or <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong> and the instructions in file Sys_read.txt on the system<br />

disk.<br />

The application software allows you to modify the parameters of the PCU 20<br />

applications and thus to:<br />

-- Select languages<br />

-- Change tool-specific cursor texts (cust.txt)<br />

-- Alter display machine data and<br />

-- Change the MPI parameters (NETNAMES.INI)<br />

-- Load alarm text files<br />

Note<br />

Before installing the contents of the application disks, please read the “SW/HW replacement”<br />

description in the Installation and Start-Up Guide for the <strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>810D</strong> or <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong> and the instructions in file App_read.txt on the application<br />

disk.<br />

The Toolbox contains the following <strong>ShopMill</strong> data:<br />

-- <strong>ShopMill</strong> machine data blocks<br />

-- Cycles, definitions (macros, GUD) and examples<br />

-- Configuration files for the tool management function<br />

The PLC Toolbox contains the <strong>ShopMill</strong> library which comprises<br />

-- the modules of the <strong>ShopMill</strong>-PLC program<br />

-- the modules of the basic standard program for <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

-- STL sources for tool management, machine control panel and OBs<br />

The other Toolbox disks include the NC-VAR selector and are the same as the<br />

standard Toolbox disks of the <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> system.<br />

Note<br />

Please read the information in file siemensd.txt (German) or siemense.txt<br />

(English) in the PLC Toolbox.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

Please proceed as follows for installing and starting up the NC:<br />

1. PCU<br />

2. NC<br />

3. PLC<br />

2.2.1 Starting up <strong>ShopMill</strong> on a PCU 20<br />

Installation via the<br />

PC card<br />

Installing the system disks on PC/PG<br />

1. Call program sys_inst from system disk 1.<br />

2. Select option “Install System disk on hard disk”.<br />

3. Specify the drive on which you wish to install the system disks.<br />

4. Specify the directory in which you wish to install the system<br />

disks. sys_inst suggests \pcu20.sys. You can change this if<br />

necessary.<br />

5. sys_inst may require you to insert the 2nd system disk.<br />

6. Exit the program with .<br />

Installing the application disks on a PC/PG<br />

1. Call program app_inst from application disk 1.<br />

2. Specify the drive on which you wish to install the application<br />

disks.<br />

3. Specify the directory in which you wish to install the application<br />

disks. app_inst suggests \pcu20.app. You can change<br />

this if necessary.<br />

4. app_inst may require you to insert the 2nd application disk.<br />

5. Exit the program with .<br />

Fig. 2-1 Installing on a PC/PG<br />

2-19


2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

2-20<br />

1. Switch to the directory instutil of the application software (e.g.<br />

\pcu20.app\instutil (the directory specified during installation of<br />

the application disks on the PC/PG).<br />

2. Call app_inst.<br />

3. You may change the configuration as required (e.g. user texts,<br />

PLC texts, alarms, select languages, select modules for<br />

installation, etc.).<br />

4. Return to the main menu by pressing Esc.<br />

5. Select option “Install all modules on hardware”.<br />

6. Select option “Create Flash Memory Card image”.<br />

7. Specify the source directory in which file sys_inst is stored.<br />

8. Specify the target directory to which you wish to copy the<br />

system/application image file.<br />

File PCU20.ABB is created.<br />

9. Insert the PC card into the PCMCIA slot of the PC/PG.<br />

10. Transfer the created image file to the PC card using<br />

SINUCOPY-FFS.<br />

Fig. 2-2 Creating a PC card<br />

Note<br />

Installing the application disks on PC card<br />

12.01<br />

You do not need to separately copy the system software to the PC card as it is<br />

copied over automatically with the application software.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Loading the PC card to the PCU 20<br />

1. Switch off the control.<br />

2. Insert a PC card with new PCU SW release.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

3. Switch on the control.<br />

4. Press key 6 when the message “PCU 20 Boot Software”<br />

appears on the screen while the PCU 20 is booting.<br />

5. Select option “Update from PC Card”.<br />

6. When data comparison has been completed, the message:<br />

“Remove PC card” appears.<br />

7. On removal of the PC card, the control boots and starts up<br />

automatically.<br />

Fig. 2-3 Loading the PC card to the PCU 20<br />

For instructions on how to upgrade the HMI software on PCU HW, please refer<br />

to the HMI Installation and Start-Up Guide for <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong>.<br />

References: /IAM/, HMI Installation & Start-up Guide,<br />

IM2 Installation and Start-Up of HMI Embedded<br />

2-21


2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

2.2.2 Starting up <strong>ShopMill</strong> on a PCU 50<br />

Installation via the<br />

RS-232 interface<br />

(FAT 32)<br />

2-22<br />

12.01<br />

When you install <strong>ShopMill</strong> on the PCU 50, you can choose the <strong>ShopMill</strong> variant<br />

you wish to use, i.e. <strong>ShopMill</strong> Classic or <strong>ShopMill</strong> Open. <strong>ShopMill</strong> Classic is the<br />

software package previously marketed under the name <strong>ShopMill</strong>. For information<br />

about <strong>ShopMill</strong> Open, please refer to Section 13.9 “<strong>ShopMill</strong> Open”.<br />

Note<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> uses the alarm texts and PLC messages of the standard operator<br />

interface. For detailed information, please refer to the following publications:<br />

References: /IAC/, Installation Guide <strong>810D</strong><br />

/IAD/, Installation Guide <strong>840D</strong>.<br />

Preconditions:<br />

1. The interlnk.exe application must be installed on the PC/PG.<br />

2. The following line must be present in the config.sys file of the<br />

PC/PG:<br />

device = [path]\interlnk.exe /auto<br />

([path] = path of interlnk.exe file, e.g. c:\programs)<br />

3. Connect the PCU 50 (X6) to the serial or parallel interface on<br />

the PC/PG.<br />

Activate the PCU 50:<br />

4. Switch on the control and when the message ”Sinumerik”<br />

appears as the PCU50 is booting, press the ”Cursor down” key<br />

and then ”Enter”.<br />

5. Select option “Start PC Link”.<br />

6. Enter password.<br />

7. Intersvr opens.<br />

Fig. 2-4 Installation via the RS-232 interface (FAT 32)<br />

1<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Installation via<br />

floppy disk drive<br />

Installing the software:<br />

8. Restart the PC/PG.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

9. Copy the contents of the system disk on the Windows<br />

interface of the PC/PG to d:\install on the PCU 50. Do not<br />

copy over the disk directories themselves.<br />

Note:<br />

Once the PC/PG has rebooted, the PCU 50 displays the drive on<br />

the PC/PG which corresponds to drive D on the PCU 50, (e.g. D:<br />

equals F:, i.e. the files must be copied to drive F).<br />

10. Close Intersvr on the PCU 50 with Alt+F4.<br />

11. Installation is menu-driven.<br />

12. Select the <strong>ShopMill</strong> variant.<br />

Fig. 2-5 Installation via the RS-232 interface (FAT 32)<br />

1<br />

1. Switch on the control and when the message ”Sinumerik”<br />

appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press the ”Cursor down” key<br />

and then ”Enter”.<br />

2. Select Option “Install/Update <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> System”.<br />

3. Enter password.<br />

4. Select option “Install from Floppy Disk”.<br />

5. Insert the first disk and follow the menu.<br />

Note:<br />

YoumustcopythefilestodriveF.<br />

6. Select the <strong>ShopMill</strong> variant.<br />

7. After installing the software, power down the PCU 50 with ”Exit”<br />

and then reboot it again.<br />

Fig. 2-6 Installation via floppy disk drive<br />

2-23


2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

Installation via<br />

network link<br />

2-24<br />

12.01<br />

The SW is first transferred from the PC/PG to D:\Install on the PCU 50 and then<br />

automatically installed when the PCU 50 next boots.<br />

In the example given below, the PC/PG has computer number r3344 and the<br />

SW to be installed is stored in directory SHOPMILL\SM_INST.<br />

Preconditions:<br />

S PC/PG with Windows NT4 or Windows95/98<br />

S Set protocol NETBBEUI on the PC/PG<br />

Start --> Settings--> Control Panel --> Network --><br />

Configuration tab --> “Add”: NETBEUI pro<br />

S Determine the computer name of the PC/PG:<br />

Start --> Settings --> Control Panel --> Network --><br />

Identification tab --> “Computer Name”: e.g. r3344<br />

S Share the directory on the PC/PG in which the SW to<br />

be installed is stored:<br />

PC/PG with Windows NT4:<br />

Assign a share name (e.g. SHOPMILL)<br />

Enter share authorization (e.g. User1 [llocal user] or<br />

“anyone” with ”read” access)<br />

PC/PG with Windows 95/98<br />

Enter a share name (e.g. SHOPMILL)<br />

Enter access authorization<br />

assign password if necessary<br />

S Select share level on a PC/PG with 95/98:<br />

Start --> Settings --> Control Panel --> Network --><br />

Access Control tab --> Select ”Share Level”<br />

S Connect the PC/PG and PCU 50 using an Ethernet<br />

cable of type “Converted Twisted Pair”<br />

Activate the PCU 50:<br />

1. Switch on the control and when the message<br />

”Sinumerik” appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press<br />

the ”Cursor down” key and then ”Enter”.<br />

2. Select Option “Install/Update <strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

System”.<br />

3. Enter password.<br />

4. Select option “Install from Network Drive”.<br />

5. Select option “Connect to Network Drive”.<br />

Fig. 2-7 Installation via a network link<br />

1<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

1<br />

2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

Make connection to the PC/PG:<br />

6. Enter a user name and password with which the SW<br />

can be fetched from the shared directory on the PC/PG<br />

(password entry can be confirmed).<br />

PC/PG with Windows NT4:<br />

User name and password of a local user of the PC/PG.<br />

PC/PG with Windows 95/98:<br />

Optional user name, password identical to password<br />

specified for shared directory (if applicable).<br />

7. Enter drive letter under which the PC/PG is displayed<br />

on the PCU 50.<br />

E.g.: H<br />

8. Enter the computer name of the PC/PG and directory<br />

name (share name) of the PC/PG to be accessed.<br />

E.g.: \\r3344\Shopmill<br />

9. The following message appears on the PCU 50:<br />

Connected Network Drive (last):<br />

H: (\\r3344\SHOPMILL)<br />

Install Directory: F:\Install<br />

Note:<br />

F:\Install is a default setting and can/must be changed.<br />

10. Select option “Change Install Directory”.<br />

11. Enter drive letter under which the PC/PG is displayed<br />

on the PCU 50 and a subdirectory if applicable.<br />

E.g.: H:\SM_INST<br />

Start transmission and SW installation:<br />

12. Select option “Install from H:\SM_INST”.<br />

13. The SW transfer from the PC/PG to D:\INSTALL on the<br />

PCU 50 commences.<br />

After the SW has been transferred, the PCU 50 is automatically<br />

restarted and the transferred SW is installed<br />

menu-driven.<br />

14. Select the <strong>ShopMill</strong> variant.<br />

Fig. 2-8 Installation via a network link<br />

2-25


2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

Language<br />

2-26<br />

If you want to display all connected drives, proceed as follows:<br />

1. Switch on the control and when the message<br />

”Sinumerik” appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press<br />

the ”Cursor down” key and then ”Enter”.<br />

2. Select Option “Install/Update <strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

System”.<br />

3. Enter password.<br />

4. Select option “Install from Network Drive”.<br />

5. Select option “Show connected Network Drives”.<br />

Fig. 2-9 Show connected drives<br />

If you want to disconnect from all network drives again, proceed as follows:<br />

1. Switch on the control and when the message<br />

”Sinumerik” appears as the PCU 50 is booting, press<br />

the ”Cursor down” key and then ”Enter”.<br />

2. Select Option “Install/Update <strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

System”.<br />

3. Enter password.<br />

4. Select option “Install from Network Drive”.<br />

5. Select option “Disconnect from all Network Drives”.<br />

Fig. 2-10 Disconnect from network drives<br />

12.01<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> software package includes 5 languages (German, English,<br />

French, Italian and Spanish).<br />

The foreground language is always German.<br />

To select the background language, press the softkeys ”MMC” and ”Languages”<br />

in succession in the ”Start-up” operating area on the CNC ISO operator interface<br />

and mark the desired language.<br />

Use the ”Change Language” softkey to toggle between the foreground and<br />

background language in the ”Start-up” area of the CNC ISO operator interface.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

2.2.3 NC start-up<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

Please proceed as follows for installing and starting up the NC:<br />

Machine<br />

Yes<br />

Preconditions:<br />

NC card with 8 MB memory and required<br />

NCK software release<br />

Enter password for the machine<br />

manufacturer<br />

Load standard MD for milling from directory<br />

tools\md\...<br />

MVAR3A1S.8X0 (3 axes/1 spindle)<br />

MVAR4A1S.8X0 (4 axes/1 spindle)<br />

NCK reset<br />

Configure axes and start<br />

up drives<br />

Fig. 2-11 NC start-up<br />

NCK reset<br />

Is the software version<br />

installed on<br />

the NC?<br />

No<br />

Insert the NC card<br />

Load the software to RAM<br />

-- Start-up switch=1 (reset NCK)<br />

-- Start-up switch=0 (NCK reset)<br />

Load standard MD for milling from directory<br />

tools\md\...<br />

MVAR3A1S.8X0 (3 axes/1 spindle)<br />

MVAR4A1S.8X0 (4 axes/1 spindle)<br />

1<br />

Test configuration without drives<br />

Load simulation data for<br />

axes from directory<br />

tools\md\SIM.8X0<br />

2-27


2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

2-28<br />

Fig. 2-12 NC start-up<br />

NCK reset<br />

Transfer tool management data from directory:<br />

tools\sd\....<br />

TM_WO_GR.8X0<br />

(configuration without dual gripper, e.g.<br />

for machine with disk-type magazine)<br />

TM_W_GR.8x0<br />

(configuration with dual gripper, e.g. for<br />

machine with chain magazine)<br />

1<br />

Load <strong>ShopMill</strong> MD from directory<br />

tools\md\CMM.8X0<br />

Note:<br />

This file also contains the MD for TOOL-<br />

MAN, which may have to be adapted to<br />

the machine.<br />

NCK reset<br />

Load definitions from directory:<br />

tools\cycles\define<br />

Activate definitions by selecting<br />

softkey “Activate”<br />

Load <strong>ShopMill</strong> cycles from directory:<br />

tools\cycles<br />

Note: After loading, the <strong>ShopMill</strong> cycles<br />

are stored in directories Standard Cycles<br />

and Manufacturer Cycles.<br />

PCU 50: Load the <strong>ShopMill</strong> cycles with<br />

”Load” softkey<br />

Note: These data must be adapted if MD<br />

has been modified for tool management<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

2.2.4 PLC start-up<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

Please proceed as follows for installing and starting up the PLC:<br />

Fig. 2-13 PLC start-up<br />

Preconditions:<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> machine data are loaded<br />

Reset memory on the PLC<br />

Memory capacity after reset 96 KB<br />

Install the <strong>ShopMill</strong> library on PG/PC<br />

(call with install.bat).<br />

Note: The catalog name of the library is<br />

SMxxyyzz (xxyyzz = version number)<br />

All modules and all source files are copied from<br />

the <strong>ShopMill</strong> library to the PLC user project.<br />

The following source file must be compiled for<br />

the tool management in the PLC user project:<br />

TM_WO_GR.AWL<br />

(data transfer without dual gripper, e.g. for machine<br />

with disk-type magazine)<br />

TM_W_GR.AWL<br />

(data transfer with dual gripper, e.g. for machine<br />

with chain magazine)<br />

Note:<br />

The generated modules are stored in the user<br />

area and must be adapted to match the machine.<br />

Supply <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82 in user program<br />

Part 1<br />

The following source code can be used to do<br />

this:<br />

S FC90_OP32S.AWL<br />

S FC90_MSTT19.AWL<br />

Note: The generated modules are stored in the<br />

user area and must be adapted to match the<br />

machine.<br />

1<br />

2-29


2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.2 Initial start-up sequence<br />

2-30<br />

Fig. 2-14 PLC start-up<br />

Compile one of the following source files for <strong>840D</strong><br />

or <strong>810D</strong>:<br />

S GPOB<strong>810D</strong>.AWL<br />

S GPOB<strong>840D</strong>.AWL<br />

Note:<br />

Supplement the machine control panel call<br />

(FC19/24) and assign the parameters for the Shop-<br />

Mill interface DB82 (FC90) in user program Part 1.<br />

Load the project in the PLC<br />

1<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

2.3 Series start-up<br />

Application areas<br />

Sequence of<br />

operations<br />

Series start-up is used to<br />

S upgrade or<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.3 Series start-up<br />

S to install the software on several machines.<br />

During upgrading, am NC and a PLC archive are created and these restored<br />

after upgrading.<br />

When upgrading several machines, a standard software installation is carried<br />

out on the 1st machine and an NC and a PLC archive created, which is then<br />

restored to the other machines.<br />

When creating or restoring a series start-up archive, you can choose between 5<br />

different storage media:<br />

S RS-232<br />

The start-up archives are saved on a device connected via the RS-232 interface.<br />

Please refer to the details for series start-up in the following publication:<br />

References: /IAD/, Installation and Start-Up Guide<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/SIMODRIVE 611 digital,<br />

Section “Data backup via MMC 100”.<br />

S NC card<br />

The free memory (approx. 2 MB) on the NC card (PCMCIA card) can be<br />

used to save the start-up archive it contains.<br />

S PG (PCU 50 only)<br />

Thestart-uparchivesaresavedtoaPC.<br />

S Archive (PCU 50 only)<br />

Thestart-uparchivesaresavedtoharddisk.<br />

S Diskette (PCU 50 only)<br />

The start-up archives are saved to diskette.<br />

The exact operating sequence is specified in the following publication:<br />

References: /BA/, Operator’s Guide <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong>/FM-NC,<br />

Chapter “Operating Area Services”.<br />

Note<br />

When you create an archive, you can save the NC and PLC separately or<br />

together.<br />

When reading in the archive files, the NC archive must be read in first, then it is<br />

necessary to perform an NCK reset and, if necessary, a PLC initial clear. Then<br />

the PLC archive is read in. Note that all the data of the NC or PLC are deleted<br />

and replaced with those in the archive.<br />

J<br />

2-31


2Installation and Start-Up<br />

2.3 Series start-up<br />

2-32<br />

Notes<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


Supplementary Conditions<br />

Requirements<br />

S <strong>ShopMill</strong> is only executed in channel 1, mode group 1.<br />

S Up to 5 axes plus a spindle are displayed on the <strong>ShopMill</strong> operator interface.<br />

S The machine axes are assigned to fixed numbers (1=X, 2=Y, 3=Z).<br />

S The spindle can be assigned to axis numbers 4, 5 or 6.<br />

S <strong>ShopMill</strong> is only executed with tool management.<br />

S You can only use one operator panel with <strong>ShopMill</strong>.<br />

S Handheld programming unit (HHU) in addition to <strong>ShopMill</strong> on PCU 50 on<br />

request only.<br />

S The HMI and Windows screen savers must not be used at the same time.<br />

References: /IAM/, IM2 Installation and Start-Up of HMI Embedded<br />

IM4 Installation and Start-Up of HMI Advanced.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

3<br />

J<br />

3-33


3 Supplementary Conditions<br />

3-34<br />

Notes<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


PLC Program<br />

4.1 Structure of the PLC program<br />

General<br />

OB100<br />

Restart<br />

OB1<br />

Cyclic<br />

Processing<br />

OB40<br />

Process alarm<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program, tool management and standard basic program<br />

must be called in OBs 1, 40 and 100 as shown in Fig. 4-1.<br />

FC100<br />

Tool Management<br />

FB1<br />

FC2<br />

Start<br />

User program<br />

Start<br />

FC34<br />

FC30<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

PLC<br />

program<br />

User program Part 2<br />

FC3<br />

Fig. 4-1 Structure of the PLC program<br />

GP_PRAL<br />

User program<br />

DBs for<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> diagnostic module<br />

for start-up purposes<br />

NCK/Mode<br />

grp./Channel/Spindle<br />

The user program Part 1<br />

includes<br />

S Call FC19/24<br />

S Parameter assignment for the<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82 (FC90).<br />

FB110, DB110<br />

Tool Management<br />

DB81<br />

HMI GP_HP<br />

interface<br />

DB83-88<br />

Data module for<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program<br />

FC31-33<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC<br />

program<br />

Ggroup<br />

distributor<br />

alternative<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

FC24<br />

MCP of<br />

OP032S<br />

FC19<br />

Standard MCP<br />

FC90<br />

Parameter assignment for<br />

the <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB 82<br />

DB82<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

interface<br />

FC35<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

PLC program<br />

FC9<br />

ASUB<br />

FB4<br />

PI service<br />

4<br />

4-35


4PLCProgram<br />

4.2 Example for OB1 and OB100<br />

4.2 Example for OB1 and OB100<br />

General<br />

Example of OB1<br />

4-36<br />

12.01<br />

The PLC programs GPOB<strong>810D</strong>.AWL and GPOB<strong>840D</strong>.AWL are available in the<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC library. The user can change these accordingly and recompile<br />

them.<br />

The source files contain calls for the standard basic program, the machine control<br />

panel, the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program and the tool management. OB1 and<br />

OB100 are illustrated below, whereby the calls for the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program<br />

and tool management are marked in bold type. The call sequence for the modules<br />

given in the example must not be changed.<br />

ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB1<br />

VERSION: 5.2<br />

VAR_TEMP<br />

OB1_EV_CLASS: BYTE;<br />

OB1_SCAN_1: BYTE;<br />

OB1_PRIORITY: BYTE;<br />

OB1_OB_NUMBR: BYTE;<br />

OB1_RESERVED_1: BYTE;<br />

OB1_RESERVED_2: BYTE;<br />

OB1_PREV_CYCLE: INT;<br />

OB1_MIN_CYCLE: INT;<br />

OB1_MAX_CYCLE: INT;<br />

OB1_DATE_TIME:<br />

//Data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

DATE_AND_TIME;<br />

START_UP: BOOL;<br />

// INSERT USER LOCAL DATA HERE<br />

// Insert user data from here<br />

END_VAR<br />

BEGIN<br />

//<br />

//<br />

//<br />

// Basic program<br />

CALL FC2;<br />

// INSERT USER PROGRAM PART 1 HERE<br />

// Insert user program part 1 from here<br />

//First cycle of OB1 store into “START_UP”<br />

L #OB1_SCAN_1;<br />

L 1;<br />

==I;<br />

= #START_UP;<br />

//Machine control panel/Operator panel<br />

L DB82.DBB0;<br />

L 0;<br />

==I ;<br />

SPB MOD0;<br />

//small operator panel<br />

L DB82.DBB0;<br />

L 1;<br />

==I ;<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

SPB MOD1;<br />

//standard operator panel 19’’<br />

SPA FC90;<br />

//no operator panel selected<br />

//<br />

MOD0: CALL FC24(<br />

ModeGroupNo :=B#16#1,<br />

ChanNo :=B#16#1,<br />

SpindleIFNo :=B#16#5,<br />

FeedHold :=M100.0,<br />

SpindleHold :=M100.1,<br />

SpindleDir<br />

SPA FC90;<br />

:=M100.2);<br />

//<br />

MOD1: CALL FC19(<br />

ModeGroupNo :=B#16#1,<br />

ChanNo :=B#16#1,<br />

SpindleIFNo :=B#16#5,<br />

FeedHold :=M100.0,<br />

SpindleHold :=M100.1);<br />

//<br />

FC90: CALL FC90(<br />

SpindleIFNo :=B#16#5);<br />

//<br />

//<br />

// <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program<br />

CALL FC30(INIT_SD:= #START_UP)<br />

;//Initialize <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program<br />

//Tool Management System<br />

CALL FB110, DB110;<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

4PLCProgram<br />

4.2 Example for OB1 and OB100<br />

// INSERT USER PROGRAM PART 2 HERE<br />

//Insert user program part 2 from here<br />

END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK<br />

4-37


4PLCProgram<br />

4.2 Example for OB1 and OB100<br />

OB100<br />

example<br />

4-38<br />

ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB100<br />

VERSION: 5.2<br />

VAR_TEMP<br />

OB100_EV_CLASS: BYTE;<br />

OB100_STRTUP: BYTE;<br />

OB100_PRIORITY: BYTE;<br />

OB100_OB_NUMBR: BYTE;<br />

OB100_RESERVED_1: BYTE;<br />

OB100_RESERVED_2: BYTE;<br />

OB100_STOP: WORD;<br />

OB100_RESERVED_3: WORD;<br />

OB100_RESERVED_4: WORD;<br />

OB100_DATE_TIME: DATE_AND_TIME;<br />

END_VAR<br />

BEGIN<br />

//Tool Management System<br />

CALL FC100( RealMagLoc :=30);<br />

//Number of locations in real magazine<br />

//<br />

//Basic program<br />

CALL FB1 , DB7(<br />

MCPNum :=1,<br />

MCP1In :=P#E0.0,<br />

MCP1Out :=P#A0.0,<br />

MCP1StatSend :=P#A8.0<br />

MCP1StatRec :=P#A12.0,<br />

MCP1BusAdr :=14,<br />

MCP1Timeout :=S5T#700MS,<br />

MCP1Cycl :=S5T#200MS,<br />

MCPMPI :=TRUE,<br />

NCCyclTimeout :=S5T#200MS,<br />

NCRunupTimeout :=S5T#50S,<br />

NCKomm :=TRUE);<br />

// INSERT USER PROGRAM HERE<br />

//Insert user program from here<br />

END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK<br />

Note<br />

The OB100 example applies to the <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong>. On the <strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>, the value of MCP1BusAdr:=6 and MCPMPI: is FALSE.<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

4.3 Overview of blocks<br />

4.3.1 Function blocks<br />

The following list shows the function blocks used by <strong>ShopMill</strong>.<br />

Table 4-1 Function blocks for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

4PLCProgram<br />

4.3 Overview of blocks<br />

Block Comment<br />

FC30 <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program; is called in OB1.<br />

FC31 -33 <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program; are only loaded.<br />

FC34 Diagnostics block for monitoring the standard interface signals written<br />

by the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program; can be called for diagnostics purposes<br />

in OB1.<br />

FC35 <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program; is only loaded.<br />

FC90 Supplies the <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82; can be called in OB1.<br />

FC100 Sample block for the configuration of tool management<br />

function; called in OB100.<br />

FB20 HiGraphErrEmitterFB block for errors and monitoring time; is only<br />

loaded.<br />

FB110 Sample block for transfer of tool management data; called in OB1.<br />

Note<br />

S The numbers of the function blocks FC30--35 must not be changed. This<br />

means that the blocks with these numbers already allocated by the user<br />

program must be changed.<br />

S Block FB20 is loaded only. It must be available in the automation system<br />

(AS) during operation. A block call is not required.<br />

S The blocks for tool management are described in Chapter 9 “Tool Management”.<br />

When using the tool management on a machine for the first time,<br />

please note that the tool management uses data blocks DB71--DB74; these<br />

data blocks cannot be assigned by the user PLC basic program.<br />

4-39


4PLCProgram<br />

4.3 Overview of blocks<br />

4.3.2 Data blocks<br />

4-40<br />

The data blocks used by <strong>ShopMill</strong> are listed below:<br />

Table 4-2 Data blocks for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Block Comment<br />

DB81 HMI interface<br />

DB82 <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface<br />

DB83 -87 Data blocks for <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program<br />

DB110 Instance data block for FB110<br />

Note<br />

12.01<br />

The numbers of the data blocks DB81--87 must not be changed. This means<br />

that the blocks with these numbers already allocated by the user program must<br />

be changed.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

4.4 Description of blocks<br />

4.4.1 <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program<br />

FC30...35<br />

FC90<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

4PLCProgram<br />

4.4 Description of blocks<br />

The function blocks FC30...35 control the machine control panel functionality in<br />

DB82 and the HMI functionality in DB81.<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> is much more than just an operator interface consisting of screen<br />

forms and images; in addition, it offers a complete operator system providing the<br />

user with the necessary functions for each control state. For example, the Shop-<br />

Mill operation mode “Manual” is not identical to the NCK operating mode “JOG”.<br />

For example, in order to execute the functions “Zero point Workpiece”, “Measure<br />

tool”, “Positioning”, etc. in “Manual”, <strong>ShopMill</strong> switches automatically at NC<br />

Start to NC operating mode “Automatic” and back again to “JOG” mode at the<br />

end of the function or at NC Stop. Thus from the operator’s point of view, the<br />

manual functions are independent of the control operating modes of the NC.<br />

This functionality, which is continued in the <strong>ShopMill</strong> “Automatic” mode, is implemented<br />

at the PCU (<strong>ShopMill</strong> user interface) and in the PLC (<strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program<br />

FC30).<br />

The following sample source files are available in the <strong>ShopMill</strong> library for parameter<br />

assignment to the <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82:<br />

S FC90_MSTT19.AWL (key assignment for MCP19”)<br />

S FC90_OP32S.AWL (key assignment for MCP of the OP032S)<br />

Compilation of the above-mentioned STL sources produces the FC90 module.<br />

FC90 can be called in OB1 in Part 1 of the user program.<br />

If FC90 is not used, the following signals must be supplied in DB82:<br />

S DB82 DBB0 (transmission mode for MCP signals)<br />

S DB82 DBB8 (assignment: spindle/axis data record 4 or 5)<br />

4-41


4PLCProgram<br />

4.4 Description of blocks<br />

4.4.2 <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

Description of<br />

function<br />

Overview for active<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC<br />

4-42<br />

12.01<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program also requires an interface to the PLC program in<br />

addition to the internal interface to the user interface or to the NC interface. This<br />

is provided in the <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82.<br />

The machine control panel’s signals (<strong>ShopMill</strong> operating modes Reset, Start,<br />

Stop, Spindle clockwise/counter-clockwise/off, etc.) must be input into this interface<br />

by PLC user program part 1. The <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program then carries out<br />

the relevant actions and returns the current status to DB82. This can then be<br />

assessed by PLC user program part 2.<br />

The figure below shows the connections for the active <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program.<br />

MPI bus<br />

HMI<br />

interface<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

PLC<br />

program<br />

PCU module<br />

DB81<br />

FC30<br />

Base<br />

signals<br />

Data<br />

transfer<br />

Outputs<br />

DB82<br />

Inputs<br />

User program<br />

DB10 DB11 DB21<br />

NC Mode<br />

group<br />

Fig. 4-2 <strong>ShopMill</strong> operation<br />

Inputs<br />

IB 0...7<br />

Outputs<br />

QB 0...7<br />

Inputs<br />

(keys,<br />

switches)<br />

Active<br />

Standard interface signals<br />

OP032S operator panel<br />

Outputs<br />

(indicators, etc.)<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> interface<br />

Channel<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Interlocking logic<br />

for MCP signals<br />

Note<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

4PLCProgram<br />

4.4 Description of blocks<br />

When the <strong>ShopMill</strong> user interface is active, the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program is also<br />

activated. This is displayed by the output signal DB82 DBX36.0<br />

“cmm_plc_activ”=1. The <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82 must be assigned<br />

parameters by the user program. The data transfer of the base signals from<br />

IB0...7/QB0...7 is set via the DB82 DBB0 signal “transfer_base_sig”. The<br />

default interface signals allocated by the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program must not be<br />

overwritten by the user.<br />

The interlocking/security logic in the PLC user program for the signals DB82<br />

DBX4.1, “base_sig.nc_cycle_start” and DB82 DBX9.1, “spindle_start” must not<br />

be implemented directly in the NCK interface but must act on the associated<br />

input signals in IB0...7 of the MCP.<br />

In addition, the DB21 DBX7.0 signal “NC start disable” can be activated for an<br />

invalid start.<br />

The interlocking signals must be in the PLC user program Part 1 before<br />

FC19/FC24.<br />

4-43


4PLCProgram<br />

4.4 Description of blocks<br />

4.4.3 Diagnostics function for start-up purposes<br />

Description of<br />

function<br />

Example<br />

Initialize diagnostics<br />

function<br />

Activate diagnostics<br />

function<br />

Acknowledgment<br />

from diagnostics<br />

function<br />

Call<br />

4-44<br />

12.01<br />

The diagnostics block FC34 is used to monitor the default signals affected by<br />

the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program (see Section 4.5 ”Standard interface signals for/from<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong>”). These signals must not be altered by the PLC user program. If<br />

changes in the signals take place, the diagnostics block indicates this error in its<br />

circular buffer for error messages (20 entries possible). If a signal is cyclically<br />

changed, a new entry is conducted in the error message buffer in each PLC<br />

cycle. This function is activated via the data block DB82 DBX60.0.<br />

DBX60.0 = 1 (monitor_on)<br />

DBX60.1 = 1 (monitor_initialize)<br />

DBX60.0 = 1 (monitor_on)<br />

DBX60.1 = 0 (monitor_initialize)<br />

Error message1 (e.g. for DB11DBX0.1)<br />

DBW62 current_number # 0 (error event counter) ......... 1<br />

DBB64 db_number (decimal output) .................... 11<br />

DBB65 byte_number (decimal output) ................... 0<br />

DBB66 bit_number (decimal output) .................... 1<br />

Error message 2 (e.g. for DB21DBX7.1)<br />

DBW68 current_number # 0 (error event counter) ......... 2<br />

DBB70 db_number (decimal output) .................... 21<br />

DBB71 byte_number (decimal output) ................... 7<br />

DBB72<br />

etc.<br />

bit_number (decimal output) .................... 1<br />

The function block in OB 1 must be called in the following sequence:<br />

Note<br />

FC2 Basic program block<br />

FC34 Diagnostics block<br />

User program Part 1<br />

(interlocking logic, FC19/24 machine control panel block)<br />

FC30 <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program<br />

FB110 Data transfer block for <strong>ShopMill</strong> tool management<br />

in standard mode<br />

User program Part 2<br />

The tool box (PLC library) contains the example VAT82 for the variable table.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

4PLCProgram<br />

4.5 Standard interface signals for/from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

4.5 Standard interface signals for/from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

A list of the default interface signals affected by the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program<br />

FC30 is given below.<br />

Table 4-3 Standard interface signals for/from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Byte Designation<br />

DB11 Signals to mode group (PLC - - ->NCK)<br />

DBB0 Bit0<br />

AUTOMATIC mode<br />

Bit1<br />

MDA mode<br />

Bit2<br />

JOG mode<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1<br />

DBB1 Bit0<br />

Bit1<br />

Bit2<br />

Machine function TEACH IN<br />

Machine function REPOS<br />

Machine function REF<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions Basic Machine, K1<br />

DB19 Signals from operator panel (HMI - - ->PLC)<br />

DBX20 Bit6 Simulation active<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, A2<br />

DB21 Signals to NCK channel (PLC - - ->NCK)<br />

DBB0 Bit5 Activate M01<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1<br />

DBB0 Bit6 Activate dry run feedrate<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, V1<br />

DBB1 Bit7 Activate program testing<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1<br />

DBB2 Bit0 Skip block<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1<br />

DBB6 Bit2 Delete distance to go<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, A2<br />

DBB7 Bit1<br />

Bit3<br />

Bit7<br />

NC Start<br />

NC Stop<br />

Reset<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, K1<br />

DB3X(X=4to6) Signals to spindle (PLC - - ->NCK)<br />

DBB30 Bit0<br />

Bit1<br />

Bit2<br />

Spindle Stop<br />

Spindle Start CW rotation<br />

Spindle Start CCW rotation<br />

DB3X(X=4to6) Signals from spindle (NCK - - ->PLC)<br />

DBW86 M function for spindle<br />

see /FB1/, Description of Functions, Basic Machine, S1<br />

Note<br />

If a mode group reset is used by the PLC user program, it must be ensured that<br />

DB82 DBX4.0, “base_sig.reset” is set simultaneously in the user program.<br />

4-45


4PLCProgram<br />

4.5 Standard interface signals for/from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Sample<br />

application<br />

“Simulation<br />

active”<br />

4-46<br />

12.01<br />

The “Simulation active” signal is set in <strong>ShopMill</strong> as well as on the CNC standard<br />

operator interface. This signal can be used, for example, in the user PLC to suppress<br />

inhibition of operating mode changes to allow the simulation routine to run<br />

under <strong>ShopMill</strong>. (An operating mode changeover takes place in the <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

PLC when the simulation run starts.)<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

J


Signal Description<br />

5.1 Overview of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5.1.1 Signals to <strong>ShopMill</strong> (input signals)<br />

Table 5-1 Signals to <strong>ShopMill</strong> (input signals)<br />

Address Name Initial<br />

value<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

Comment<br />

0 CMM_IN.transfer_base_sig B#16#0 Transmission mode for MCP signals<br />

2.0 CMM_IN.base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual FALSE <strong>ShopMill</strong> Manual operating mode<br />

2.1 CMM_IN.base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic FALSE <strong>ShopMill</strong> Automatic operating mode<br />

4.0 CMM_IN.base_sig.reset FALSE RESET for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

4.1 CMM_IN.base_sig.nc_cycle_start FALSE Cycle Start<br />

4.2 CMM_IN.base_sig.nc_cycle_stop FALSE Cycle Stop<br />

6.0 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.tool FALSE Tool operating area<br />

6.1 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.directory FALSE Directory operating area<br />

6.2 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.messages FALSE Alarms/Messages operating area<br />

6.3 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.program FALSE Program operating area<br />

6.4 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.oem1 FALSE OEM1 operating area<br />

6.5 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.oem2 FALSE OEM2 operating area<br />

6.6 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.customer FALSE CUSTOMER operating area<br />

6.7 CMM_IN.sub_mode_mill.mda FALSE MDA operating area<br />

8 CMM_IN.spindle_interface_number B#16#5 Assignment of spindle/axis data record<br />

9.0 CMM_IN.user_defined_spindle_control FALSE User-defined spindle control<br />

9.1 CMM_IN.spindle_start FALSE Spindle Start<br />

9.2 CMM_IN.spindle_stop FALSE Spindle Stop<br />

9.3 CMM_IN.spindle_left FALSE Spindle rotation counter-clockwise<br />

9.4 CMM_IN.spindle_right FALSE Spindle rotation clockwise<br />

9.5 CMM_IN.program_extern_selected FALSE Program is selected in the PLC<br />

9.6 CMM_IN.disable_cnc_standard FALSE Disable switchover to CNC ISO operator interface<br />

9.7 CMM_IN.cmm_activ_in_cnc_mode TRUE <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC active during CNC ISO operation<br />

10.0 CMM_IN.program_test_request FALSE Select Program test function<br />

10.1 CMM_IN.dry_run_request FALSE Select DryRun function<br />

10.2 CMM_IN.m01_request FALSE Select M01 function<br />

10.3 CMM_IN.skip_block_request FALSE Select Skip Block function<br />

10.4 CMM_IN.boot_standard FALSE System boot on CNC ISO operator interface<br />

10.5 CMM_IN.nck_auto_req FALSE Preparation of PLC block search<br />

5<br />

5-47


5SignalDescription 5.1 Overview of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

Table 5-1 Signals to <strong>ShopMill</strong> (input signals)<br />

Address Name<br />

Initial<br />

value<br />

Comment<br />

10.6 CMM_IN.spindle_act_m30_reset FALSE Spindle active after M30 and reset<br />

10.7 CMM_IN.ignore_nck_alarm FALSE Ignore NCK alarm on cycle start<br />

11.1 CMM_IN.get_tool_data FALSE Update tool data<br />

11.2 CMM_IN.c_axis_feed_drive FALSE This signal is not evaluated by <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

11.3 CMM_IN.select_spindle_readout_0 FALSE This signal is not evaluated by <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

11.4 CMM_IN.select_spindle_readout_1 FALSE This signal is not evaluated by <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

5-48<br />

12.01<br />

12 CMM_IN.ext_m_cmd_1 90 1st extended M command for output of tool-specific<br />

M function<br />

13 CMM_IN.ext_m_cmd_2 91 2nd extended M command for output of tool-specific<br />

M function<br />

5.1.2 Signals from <strong>ShopMill</strong> (output signals)<br />

Table 5-2 Signals from <strong>ShopMill</strong> (output signals)<br />

Address Name Initial<br />

value<br />

Comment<br />

30.0 CMM_OUT.base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual FALSE <strong>ShopMill</strong> Manual operating mode<br />

30.1 CMM_OUT.base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic<br />

FALSE <strong>ShopMill</strong> Automatic operating mode<br />

32.0 CMM_OUT.base_sig.reset FALSE Reset performed<br />

32.1 CMM_OUT.base_sig.nc_cycle_activ FALSE Cycle active<br />

32.2 CMM_OUT.base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped FALSE Cycle interrupted<br />

34.0 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.tool FALSE Tool operating area activated<br />

34.1 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.directory FALSE Directory operating area activated<br />

34.2 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.messages FALSE Alarms/messages operating area activated<br />

34.3 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.program FALSE Program operating area activated<br />

34.4 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.oem1 FALSE OEM1 operating area selected<br />

34.5 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.oem2 FALSE OEM2 operating area selected<br />

34.6 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.customer FALSE CUSTOMER operating area selected<br />

34.7 CMM_OUT.sub_mode_mill.mda FALSE MDA operating area selected<br />

36.0 CMM_OUT.cmm_plc_activ FALSE <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC active<br />

36.1 CMM_OUT.cmm_mmc_active FALSE <strong>ShopMill</strong> user interface active<br />

36.2 CMM_OUT.spindle_start_req FALSE Spindle start requested (M3/M4 output to spindle)<br />

36.3 CMM_OUT.spindle_stop_req FALSE Spindle stop requested, M5 output to spindle<br />

36.4 CMM_OUT.spindle_right FALSE Spindle rotation clockwise preselected<br />

36.5 CMM_OUT.spindle_left FALSE Spindle rotation counter-clockwise preselected<br />

36.7 CMM_OUT.ext_prog_sel FALSE External program selected for execution<br />

37.0 CMM_OUT.program_selection_done FALSE HMI acknowledgement that a program has been<br />

selected<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Table 5-2 Signals from <strong>ShopMill</strong> (output signals)<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.1 Overview of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

Address Name<br />

Initial<br />

value<br />

Comment<br />

37.1 CMM_OUT.program_test_active FALSE Program test function is active<br />

37.2 CMM_OUT.dry_run_active FALSE DryRun function is active<br />

37.3 CMM_OUT.m01_active FALSE M01 function is active<br />

37.4 CMM_OUT.skip_block_activ FALSE Skip Block function is active<br />

37.7 CMM_OUT.start_up_activ FALSE <strong>ShopMill</strong> runup active<br />

42.0 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_on FALSE Tool-specific M function 1 active<br />

42.1 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_on FALSE Tool-specific M function 2 active<br />

42.2 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_on FALSE Tool-specific M function 3 active<br />

42.3 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_on FALSE Tool-specific M function 4 active<br />

42.4 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_activ FALSE Tool-spec. M function 1 active<br />

42.5 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_activ FALSE Tool-spec. M function 2 active<br />

42.6 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_activ FALSE Tool-spec. M function 3 active<br />

42.7 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_activ FALSE Tool-spec. M function 4 active<br />

44 CMM_OUT.mask_number W#16#0 Current screen number of <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

5.1.3 Diagnostics buffer signals<br />

Table 5-3 Diagnostics buffer signals<br />

Address Name Initial<br />

value<br />

Comment<br />

60.0 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_on FALSE Activate diagnostics function<br />

(input signal)<br />

60.1 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_initialize FALSE Initialize diagnostics function<br />

(input signal)<br />

62 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].current_number W#16#0 Current number of error message 1<br />

(output signal)<br />

64 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].db_number B#16#0 DB number of error message 1<br />

(output signal)<br />

65 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].byte_number B#16#0 Byte number of error message 1<br />

(output signal)<br />

66 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[1].bit_number B#16#0 Bit number of error message 1<br />

(output signal)<br />

68 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].current_number W#16#0 Current number of error message 2<br />

(output signal)<br />

70 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].db_number B#16#0 DB number of error message 2<br />

(output signal)<br />

71 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].byte_number B#16#0 Byte number of error message 2<br />

(output signal)<br />

72 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[2].bit_number B#16#0 Bit number of error message 2<br />

(output signal)<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

5-49


5SignalDescription 5.1 Overview of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

Table 5-3 Diagnostics buffer signals<br />

Address Name<br />

Initial<br />

value<br />

Comment<br />

176 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20].current_number W#16#0 Current number of error message 20<br />

(output signal)<br />

178 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20].db_number B#16#0 DB number of error message 20<br />

(output signal)<br />

179 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20].byte_number B#16#0 Byte number of error message 20<br />

(output signal)<br />

180 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[20].bit_number B#16#0 Bit number of error message 20<br />

(output signal)<br />

5-50<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5.2.1 Signals to <strong>ShopMill</strong> (input signals)<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

DB82 transfer_base_sig<br />

DBB0 Transmission mode for MCP signals<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning This signal specifies whether the base signals with the structure “base_sig” are to be used<br />

from the I/O area of the flat, slimline operator panel (OP032S) or from the standard slimline<br />

operator panel (OP031), i.e. the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC automatically copies these I/O signals to<br />

DB82.<br />

Value:<br />

0 Standard assignment; connection of a narrow-profile slimline operator panel MCP<br />

(OP032S)<br />

1 Connection of an MCP of standard slimline operator panel (OP031)<br />

² 2 Base signals are not transferred; base signals must be transferred by<br />

the operator!<br />

Note see Subsection 4.4.2 “<strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB 82”<br />

DB82 base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual<br />

DBX2.0 <strong>ShopMill</strong> Manual operating mode<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning Manual operating mode (Softkey “Machine manual”) is activated in <strong>ShopMill</strong> via this signal.<br />

Corresponding to... DB82.DBB0<br />

Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set<br />

References /BAS/, <strong>ShopMill</strong> Operator’s Guide<br />

DB82 base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic<br />

DBX2.1 <strong>ShopMill</strong> Automatic operating mode<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning Automatic operating mode (Softkey “Machine auto”) is activated in <strong>ShopMill</strong> via this signal.<br />

Corresponding to... DB82.DBB0<br />

Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set<br />

References /BAS/, <strong>ShopMill</strong> Operator’s Guide<br />

5-51


5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5-52<br />

12.01<br />

DB82 base_sig.reset<br />

DBX4.0 Reset<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning Setting this signal triggers a channel-specific reset and the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC is reset. The<br />

active program is aborted.<br />

Timing diagram<br />

CMM_IN.<br />

reset<br />

CMM_OUT.<br />

reset<br />

At least one PLC cycle set<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82.DBB0; DB82.DBX32.0, base_sig.reset<br />

Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set<br />

S If mode group reset is used by the PLC user program, you must ensure that the<br />

CMM_IN.base_sig.reset signal is set at the same time.<br />

S If NC cannot perform a reset, e.g. emergency stop state is active, then there is no<br />

acknowledgment for the “CMM_OUT.base_sig.reset” signal. In this case the channelspecific<br />

reset is present at the NC interface for at least 2 sec.<br />

DB82 base_sig.nc_cycle_start<br />

DBX4.1 Cycle Start<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1 ---> 0<br />

S <strong>ShopMill</strong> Automatic operating mode<br />

Start of the selected part program<br />

Note: The <strong>ShopMill</strong> Automatic operating mode is not identical with NC Automatic mode.<br />

Switching from NC JOG to NC Auto only after Start and internal checking by the <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

state management.<br />

S <strong>ShopMill</strong> Manual operating mode<br />

According to selected operator function:<br />

- Start of function in the screen form T, S, M, ...<br />

- Start of manual “Measure tool” with probe<br />

- Start of manual “Measure workpiece” with probe<br />

- Start of “Positioning”<br />

- Start of “Face milling”<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82.DBB0; DB82.DBX32.1, base_sig.nc_cycle_activ<br />

Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set<br />

DB82 base_sig.nc_cycle_stop<br />

DBX4.2 Cycle Stop<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

Interruption of active program<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82.DBB0; DB82.DBX32.2, base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped<br />

Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.tool<br />

DBX6.0 Tool operating area<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change 0 - - ->1 This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the machine<br />

control panel (with OP032S via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard). The appropriate<br />

operating area is displayed in <strong>ShopMill</strong> when you select this key.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.0, sub_mode_mill.tool<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.directory<br />

DBX6.1 Directory operating area<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change 0 - - ->1 This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the machine<br />

control panel (with OP032S via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard). The appropriate<br />

operating area is displayed in <strong>ShopMill</strong> when you select this key.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.1, sub_mode_mill.directory<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.messages<br />

DBX6.2 Alarms/Messages operating area<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change 0 - - ->1 This signal can be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the machine<br />

control panel (with OP032S via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard). The appropriate operating<br />

area is displayed in <strong>ShopMill</strong> when you select this key.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.2, sub_mode_mill.messages<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.program<br />

DBX6.3 Program operating area<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change 0 - - ->1 This signal can be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the machine<br />

control panel (with OP032S via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard). The appropriate operating<br />

area is displayed in <strong>ShopMill</strong> when you select this key.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.3, sub_mode_mill.program<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.oem1<br />

DBX6.4 OEM1 operating area<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Edge change 0 - - ->1 This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the 19¨<br />

machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an OP032S<br />

machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in <strong>ShopMill</strong> when you<br />

select this key.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.4, sub_mode_mill.oem1<br />

5-53


5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5-54<br />

12.01<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.oem2<br />

DBX6.5 OEM2 operating area<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Edge change 0 - - ->1 This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the 19¨<br />

machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an OP032S<br />

machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in <strong>ShopMill</strong> when you<br />

select this key.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.5, sub_mode_mill.oem2<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.customer<br />

DBX6.6 CUSTOMER operating area<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Edge change 0 - - ->1 This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the 19¨<br />

machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an OP032S<br />

machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in <strong>ShopMill</strong> when you<br />

select this key.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.6, sub_mode_mill.customer<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.mda<br />

DBX6.7 MDA operating area<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Edge change 0 - - ->1 This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the 19¨<br />

machine control panel or via hardkeys on the full CNC keyboard in the case of an OP032S<br />

machine control panel. The appropriate operating area is displayed in <strong>ShopMill</strong> when you<br />

select this key.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Note Effective only when DB82.DBB0=2 is set<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX34.7, sub_mode_mill.mda<br />

DB82 spindle_interface_number<br />

DBB8 Assignment of spindle/axis data record<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning This signal can be used to assign the spindle to an axis data record. Enter the number of<br />

the machine axis.<br />

Corresponding to... <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW release 5.3 and higher: MD 9705 CMM_INDEX_SPINDLE, enter the number<br />

of the channel axis here.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

DB82 user_defined_spindle_control<br />

DBX9.0 User-defined spindle control<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.2, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.2<br />

Signal state 0 The spindle control is supported by the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC. Interface signals DB82.DBX9.1 to<br />

DB82.DBX9.4 and DB82.DBX36.2 to DB82.DBX36.5 are active.<br />

Interface signals DB3x.DBX30.0 to DB3x.DBX30.2 are written to the axis DB of the spindle<br />

(see also Section 13.7 “Spindle control”).<br />

Signal state 1 The spindle control is not supported by the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC. Interface signals DB82.DBX9.1<br />

to DB82.DBX9.4 and DB82.DBX36.2 to DB82.DBX36.5 have no function and interface<br />

signals DB3x.DBX30.0 to DB3x.DBX30.2 are not written. The spindle must be controlled in<br />

the user PLC.<br />

DB82 spindle_start<br />

DBX9.1 Spindle Start<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

The spindle starts only when a direction of rotation is selected via interface signals<br />

DB3x.DBX30.1 or DB3x.DBX30.2.<br />

Please refer to Section 13.7 “Spindle control”.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX36.2, spindle_start_req<br />

DB82, DBX9.3, spindle_left<br />

DB82, DBX9.4, spindle_right<br />

DB82 spindle_stop<br />

DBX9.2 Spindle Stop<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change<br />

The spindle is stopped via interface signal DB3x.DBX30.0.<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

Please refer to Section 13.7 “Spindle control”.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX36.3, spindle_stop_req<br />

DB82 spindle_left<br />

DBX9.3 Spindle rotation counter-clockwise<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

Direction of spindle rotation (CCW) works only in conjunction with Spindle Start.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX36.5, spindle_left<br />

References /BAS/, <strong>ShopMill</strong> Operator’s Guide<br />

5-55


5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5-56<br />

12.01<br />

DB82 spindle_right<br />

DBX9.4 Spindle rotation clockwise<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1 ---> 0<br />

Direction of spindle rotation (CW) works only in conjunction with spindle start.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX36.4, spindle_right<br />

References /BA/, <strong>ShopMill</strong> Operator’s Guide<br />

DB82 program_extern_selected<br />

DBX9.5 Program is selected in the PLC<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning When the signal is set, it is possible to select an NC program externally from the PLC.<br />

Timing diagram<br />

DB82, DBX9.5<br />

Program_extern_selected<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> loads the<br />

program<br />

DB82, DBX37.0<br />

Program_selection_done<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX37.0, program_selection_done<br />

References /BA/, <strong>ShopMill</strong> Operator’s Guide<br />

DB82 disable_cnc_standard<br />

DBX9.6 Disable switchover to CNC ISO operator interface<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning When the signal is set, switchover from <strong>ShopMill</strong> to the CNC ISO operator interface can be<br />

disabled.<br />

DB82 cmm_active_in_cnc_mode<br />

DBX9.7 <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC active during CNC ISO operation<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning Value:<br />

0: <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC not active during CNC ISO operation<br />

1: <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC active during CNC ISO operation<br />

Application example(s) Switchover between CNC ISO and <strong>ShopMill</strong> operation is possible at any time (even when a<br />

program is active and running).<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

DB82 program_test_request<br />

DBX10.0 Select Program test function<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the<br />

machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the program test function.<br />

DB82 dry_run_request<br />

DBX10.1 Select DryRun function<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the<br />

machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the DryRun function.<br />

DB82 m01_request<br />

DBX10.2 Select M01 function<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the<br />

machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the M01 function.<br />

DB82 skip_block_request<br />

DBX10.3 Select Skip Block function<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

This signal can also be implemented in the user program via a customized key on the<br />

machine control panel. Pressing this key activates/deactivates the Skip Block function.<br />

DB82 boot_standard<br />

DBX10.4 System boot on CNC ISO operator interface<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning Setting this signal forces the system to boot on the CNC ISO operator interface. If the<br />

signal is reset again, it is possible to switch over to the <strong>ShopMill</strong> operator interface.<br />

5-57


5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5-58<br />

12.01<br />

DB82 nck_auto_req<br />

DBX10.5 Preparation of PLC block search<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Edge change<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

Switchover on the NCK from JOG to AUTO can be requested with this signal.<br />

Signal state 0 No effect<br />

Application example(s) Block search via PLC<br />

Corresponding to ... DB19, DBX6.0, signals from mode group (NCK - -> PLC) active AUTOMATIC mode<br />

DB82 spindle_act_m30_reset<br />

DBX10.6 Spindle active after M30 and reset<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Edge change<br />

The spindle is not switched off at program end and on reset. The spindle must be switched<br />

0 ---> 1<br />

off in the user PLC.<br />

Signal state 0 The spindle is switched off at program end and on reset by the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC.<br />

DB82 ignore_nck_alarm<br />

DBX10.7 Ignore NCK alarm on cycle start<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Signal meaning With an active NCK alarm (DB10.DBX109.0 = 1), e.g. battery alarm, the following applies:<br />

0: Cycle Start not possible<br />

1: Cycle Start possible<br />

Alarms<br />

- EMERGENCY STOP (DB10.DBX106.1 = 1)<br />

- NCK alarm with machining stop (DB21.DBX36.7 = 1)<br />

cannot be suppressed by this interface signal, i.e. Cycle Start is not possible in these<br />

cases.<br />

DB82 get_tool_data<br />

DBX11.1 Update tool data<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Signal state 1 or edge The tool data are updated. When this process is finished, the signal is reset again by the<br />

change 0 - - ->1<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC.<br />

Signal state 0 or<br />

edge change 1 - ->0<br />

-<br />

DB82 c_axis_feed_drive<br />

DBX11.2 Separate feed drive as C axis drive<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.2, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.2<br />

Signal meaning This signal is not evaluated by <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

DB82 select_spindle_readout_0<br />

DBX11.3 Select spindle speed display bit 0<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.2, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.2<br />

Signal meaning This signal is not evaluated by <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

DB82 select_spindle_readout_1<br />

DBX11.4 Select spindle speed display bit 1<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.2, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.2<br />

Signal meaning This signal is not evaluated by <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

DB82 ext_m_cmd_1<br />

DBX12 1st extended M command for output of tool-specific M functions<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Signal state 1 or edge<br />

change 0 - - ->1<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> utilizes 2 extended M functions to output tool-specific M functions. The M command<br />

for the 1st extended M function is entered in this interface signal. The GUD7 variable/<br />

display machine data 9684 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1 must be set to this value<br />

at the same time. The default setting is 90.<br />

-<br />

Signal state 0 or<br />

edge change 1 - ->0<br />

Corresponding to ... DB19, DBB13, ext_m_cmd_2,<br />

GUD7 variable, display machine data<br />

DB82 ext_m_cmd_2<br />

DBX13 2nd extended M command for output of tool-specific M functions<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Signal state 1 or edge<br />

change 0 - - ->1<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> utilizes 2 extended M functions to output tool-specific M functions. The M command<br />

for the 2nd extended M function is entered in this interface signal. The GUD7 variable/display<br />

machine data 9684 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2 must be set to this<br />

value at the same time. The default setting is 91.<br />

-<br />

Signal state 0 or<br />

edge change 1 - ->0<br />

Corresponding to ... DB19, DBB13, ext_m_cmd_1,<br />

GUD7 variable, display machine data<br />

5-59


5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5.2.2 Signals from <strong>ShopMill</strong> (output signals)<br />

5-60<br />

12.01<br />

DB82 base_sig.main_mode_mill.manual<br />

DBX30.0 Base signals - <strong>ShopMill</strong> Manual mode<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The base signal indicates that the “Machine manual” operating area is activated. The signal<br />

DB82.DBX36.1 cmm_mmc_activ must also be gated.<br />

DB82 base_sig.main_mode_mill.automatic<br />

DBX30.1 Base signals - <strong>ShopMill</strong> Automatic mode<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The base signal indicates that the “Machine auto” operating area is activated. The signal<br />

DB82.DBX36.1 cmm_mmc_activ must also be gated.<br />

DB82 base_sig.reset<br />

DBX32.0 Reset activated<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that a channel-specific reset was performed.<br />

DB82 base_sig.nc_cycle_active<br />

DBX32.1 Cycle active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal acknowledges that a program is active.<br />

DB82 base_sig.nc_cycle_stopped<br />

DBX32.2 Cycle interrupted<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal acknowledges that a program has been interrupted.<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.tool<br />

DBX34.0 Tool operating area selected<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that the Tool operating area is activated.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.directory<br />

DBX34.1 Directory operating area selected<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that the Directory operating area is selected.<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.messages<br />

DBX34.2 Alarms/messages operating area selected<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that the Alarms/messages operating area is selected.<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.program<br />

DBX34.3 Program operating area selected<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that the Program operating area is selected.<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.oem1<br />

DBX34.4 OEM1 operating area selected<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Signal meaning This signal returns the ”OEM1 operating area selected” status.<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.oem2<br />

DBX34.5 OEM2 operating area selected<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Signal meaning This signal returns the ”OEM2 operating area selected” status.<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.customer<br />

DBX34.6 CUSTOMER operating area selected<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Signal meaning The signal returns the ”CUSTOMER operating area selected” status.<br />

DB82 sub_mode_mill.mda<br />

DBX34.7 MDA operating area selected<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Signal meaning This signal returns the ”MDA operating area selected” status.<br />

5-61


5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5-62<br />

12.01<br />

DB82 cmm_plc_active<br />

DBX36.0 <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal state 1 or edge<br />

change 0 - - ->1<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program is activated.<br />

Signal state 0 or edge The <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program is not active. The user program can execute a CNC ISO<br />

change 1 - - ->0<br />

operation.<br />

Special cases, errors, ...... The <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program is activated when the <strong>ShopMill</strong> application is loaded in the<br />

operator interface by pressing the <strong>ShopMill</strong> softkey or when the DB82 DBX9.7 signal<br />

“cmm_active_in_cnc_mode” is set to “1”.<br />

After switchover to CNC ISO operation, the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program cannot be set to an<br />

inactive state unless the DB82 DBX9.7 signal “cmm_active_in_cnc_mode” is set to “0”;<br />

otherwise, the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program remains active.<br />

DB82 cmm_mmc_active<br />

DBX36.1 <strong>ShopMill</strong> user interface active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal state 1 or edge<br />

change 0 - - ->1<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> user interface is activated.<br />

Signal state 0 or edge<br />

change 1 - - ->0<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> user interface is not active.<br />

Special cases, errors, ...... The <strong>ShopMill</strong> user interface is activated when the <strong>ShopMill</strong> application is loaded to the CNC<br />

ISO user interface via the softkey <strong>ShopMill</strong>.<br />

DB82 spindle_start_req<br />

DBX36.2 Spindle - Start requested<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that a spindle start has been requested and M3 or M4 has been<br />

executed.<br />

DB82 spindle_stop_req<br />

DBX36.3 Spindle - Stop requested<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that a spindle Stop was requested.<br />

DB82 spindle_right<br />

DBX36.4 Spindle rotation clockwise<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning This signal indicates that the plus travel command is applied at the spindle<br />

(DB3x.DBX64.7).<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

DB82 spindle_left<br />

DBX36.5 Spindle rotation counter-clockwise<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning This signal indicates that the minus travel command is applied at the spindle<br />

(DB3x.DBX64.6).<br />

DB82 ext_prog_sel<br />

DBX36.7 External program selected for execution<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.1, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.1<br />

Signal meaning An external program has been selected for execution. ”External” refers to all programs<br />

which are not stored in the NC main memory, including programs on the local hard disk, in<br />

the network drive or on other external data storage media.<br />

DB82 program_selection_done<br />

DBX37.0 HMI acknowledgement that a program has been selected<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that a program has been preselected via the PLC (FB 4 select).<br />

Corresponding to ... DB82, DBX9.5, program_extern_selected<br />

DB82 program_test_active<br />

DBX37.1 Program test function is active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that the program test function is active.<br />

DB82 dry_run_active<br />

DBX37.2 DryRun function is active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that the DryRun function is active.<br />

DB82 m01_active<br />

DBX37.3 M01 function is active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that the M01 function is active.<br />

5-63


5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5-64<br />

12.01<br />

DB82 skip_block_activ<br />

DBX37.4 Skip Block function is active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that the skip block function is active.<br />

DB82 start_up_activ<br />

DBX37.7 <strong>ShopMill</strong> runup active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 5.2, <strong>810D</strong> SW 3.2<br />

with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.2<br />

Signal meaning This signal indicates that the <strong>ShopMill</strong> operator interface has been selected by means of<br />

softkey “<strong>ShopMill</strong>”. It is reset if the <strong>ShopMill</strong> operator interface is deselected again (selection<br />

of “CNC-ISO”).<br />

DB82 tool_m_function.function_1_on<br />

DBX42.0 Tool-specific M function 1 active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that customized machine functions are active.<br />

DB82 tool_m_function.function_2_on<br />

DBX42.1 Tool-specific M function 2 active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that customized machine functions are active.<br />

DB82 tool_m_function.function_3_on<br />

DBX42.2 Tool-specific M function 3 active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that customized machine functions are active.<br />

DB82 tool_m_function.function_4_on<br />

DBX42.3 Tool-specific M function 4 active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The signal indicates that customized machine functions are active.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

DB82 tool_m_function.function_1_activ<br />

DBX42.4 Tool-spec. M function 1 active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that customized machine function 1 has been activated<br />

or deactivated. The signal is low active.<br />

DB82 tool_m_function.function_2_activ<br />

DBX42.5 Tool-spec. M function 2 active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that customized machine function 1 has been activated<br />

or deactivated. The signal is low active.<br />

DB82 tool_m_function.function_3_activ<br />

DBX42.6 Tool-spec. M function 3 active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that customized machine function 1 has been activated<br />

or deactivated. The signal is low active.<br />

DB82 tool_m_function.function_4_activ<br />

DBX42.7 Tool-spec. M function 4 active<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning This signal provides the checkback that customized machine function 1 has been activated<br />

or deactivated. The signal is low active.<br />

5-65


5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

5-66<br />

12.01<br />

DB82 mask_number<br />

DBW44 Current screen number of <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Signal meaning The signal outputs the display number of the current <strong>ShopMill</strong> screen in the MANUAL area.<br />

The following display numbers can be output:<br />

No. <strong>ShopMill</strong> screen<br />

1 Settings<br />

2 T,S,M...<br />

3 Face milling - accept with OK<br />

4 Positioning<br />

5 Zero point workpiece - edge x<br />

6 Zero point workpiece - edge y<br />

7 Zero point workpiece - edge z<br />

8 Zero point workpiece - corner<br />

9 Zero point workpiece - hole<br />

10 Zero point workpiece - spigot<br />

11 Zero point workpiece - Calibrate probe - length<br />

12 Zero point workpiece - Calibrate probe - diameter<br />

13 Measure tool - length auto<br />

14 Measure tool - diameter auto<br />

15 Measure tool - adjust probe<br />

16 Measure tool - length manual<br />

17 Measure tool - diameter manual<br />

18 Face milling<br />

19 Basic display (empty)<br />

20 MDA<br />

21 Set basic WO<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

5.2.3 Description of diagnostics buffer signals<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_on<br />

DBX60.0 Activate diagnostics function (input signal)<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The diagnostics function is updated<br />

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.monitor_initialize<br />

DBX60.1 Initialize diagnostics function (input signal)<br />

Data block Signal(s) to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning The ring buffer for the diagnostics function is cleared.<br />

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].current_number<br />

DBW n+0 Consecutive No. of error message m (output signal)<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning Consecutive No. of error message m<br />

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].db_number<br />

DBB n+2 DB number of error message m (output signal)<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning DB number of error message m<br />

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].byte_number<br />

DBB n+3 Byte number of error message m (output signal)<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning Byte number of error message m<br />

DB82 nck_signal_monitor.access_error[m].bit_number<br />

DBB n+4 Bit number of error message m (output signal)<br />

Data block Signal(s) from <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Signal meaning Bit number of error message m<br />

5-67


5SignalDescription 5.2 Description of <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB82<br />

Note<br />

5-68<br />

Start address of ring buffer entries:<br />

1st entry: n= 62<br />

2nd entry: n= 68<br />

3rd entry: n= 74<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

19th entry: n= 170<br />

20th entry: n= 176<br />

Number of error message:<br />

m= 1...20<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

J


Machine Data<br />

6.1 NC machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Machine data<br />

block <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

NC machine data<br />

with exact value<br />

assignment (G)<br />

NC machine data<br />

with minimum<br />

value assignment<br />

(M)<br />

NC machine data<br />

with variable value<br />

assignment (V)<br />

There is a machine data block cmm.8x0 for <strong>ShopMill</strong>. This set of machine data<br />

is part of the toolbox and comprises:<br />

NC machine data with exact value assignment<br />

NC machine data with a minimum value assignment<br />

NC machine data with variable value assignment<br />

Setting data<br />

NC machine data with exact value assignment are machine data, which must<br />

not be modified.<br />

NC machine data with minimum value assignment are machine data, for which<br />

the default value can be set higher.<br />

NC machine data with variable value assignment are machine data for which<br />

the default value can be set to a higher or lower value.<br />

Note<br />

The machine data for calibrating the probe (measuring cycles) can be found<br />

in Section 10.5 “Machine data for execution of measuring cycles”.<br />

When you are using a <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong> with NCU 573.2, MD 10050<br />

$MN_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME must be set to 0.0025.<br />

Set the interpolation clock cycle via MD 10050 $MN_SYSCLOCK_CY-<br />

CLE_TIME and MD 10070 $MN_IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO in such a<br />

way that a workpiece can be machined and the ”Simultaneous Recording”<br />

function is executable.<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

6<br />

6-69


6Machine Data<br />

6.1 NC machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Overview<br />

6-70<br />

Table 6-1 NC machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

NC MD<br />

number<br />

12.01<br />

Name Value Modifiable<br />

10260 $MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM 1 G<br />

10350 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS 3 M<br />

10360 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS 3 M<br />

10702 $MN_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK H10 G<br />

10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[0] 6 V<br />

10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[0] L6 V<br />

11220 $MN_INI_FILE_MODE 2 V<br />

11410 $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK H7 G<br />

11450 $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE H7 G<br />

18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK HB M<br />

18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL 40 V<br />

18084 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE 3 M<br />

18086 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION 35 V<br />

18088 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER 1 M<br />

18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA 80 V<br />

18118 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES 7 M<br />

18120 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK 20 M<br />

18130 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN 170 M<br />

18150 $MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM 35 M<br />

18160 $MN_MM_NUM_USER_MACROS 30 M<br />

18170 $MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES 140 M<br />

18180 $MN_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM 1200 M<br />

18230 $MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED 915 M<br />

18280 $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR 400 M<br />

18320 $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM 400 M<br />

20108 $MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK H09 M<br />

20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK H4041 G<br />

20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK H400 G<br />

20120 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE 0 G<br />

20128 $MC_COLLECT_TOOL_CHANGE 0 G<br />

20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE 1 G<br />

20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[15] 3 G<br />

20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[41] 2 G<br />

20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[5] 1 G<br />

20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[7] 1 G<br />

20202 $MC_WAB_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS 10 M<br />

20240 $MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_CHECK_BLOCKS 4 G<br />

20250 $MC_CUTCOM_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS 5 G<br />

20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK H400B M<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Description of NC<br />

machine data<br />

Table 6-1 NC machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

NC MD<br />

number<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

6Machine Data<br />

6.1 NC machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Name<br />

Value<br />

20320 $MC_TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK 1 G<br />

20734 $MC_EXTERN_FUNCTION_MASK H8 M<br />

21100 $MC_ORIENTATION_IS_EULER 0 G<br />

21110 $MC_X_AXIS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE 0 G<br />

22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE 1 G<br />

22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE 206 V<br />

24002 $MC_CHBFRAME_RESET_MASK HFFFE G<br />

27860 $MC_PROCESSTIMER_MODE H02 G<br />

28000 $MC_MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM 75 M<br />

28010 $MC_MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES 10 M<br />

28020 $MC_MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL 600 M<br />

28081 $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES 1 M<br />

28082 $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK H3D M<br />

35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET<br />

Note:<br />

This MD is not contained in machine data record<br />

cmm.8x0, since it is axis-dependent.<br />

Table 6-2 Setting data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Setting data<br />

number<br />

1 G<br />

Modifiable<br />

Name Value Modifiable<br />

42440 $SC_FRAME_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 0 G<br />

42442 $SC_TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG 0 G<br />

42480 $SC_STOP_CUTCOM_STOPRE 0 G<br />

42980 $SC_TOFRAME_MODE 3 G<br />

References: /LIS/, Lists<br />

/IAC/, <strong>810D</strong> Installation and Start-Up Guide<br />

/IAD/, <strong>840D</strong> Installation and Start-Up Guide<br />

/FB/, Description of Functions<br />

6-71


6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

6.2.1 Overview of machine data display<br />

Table 6-3 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

MD<br />

No.<br />

6-72<br />

MD identifier Comment Preset<br />

default<br />

9478 $MM_TO_OPTION_MASK Settings for <strong>ShopMill</strong> 1<br />

9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X Simulation of default value X 0<br />

9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y Simulation of default value Y 0<br />

9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA Simulation of default display area 100<br />

9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X Simulation of maximum display X 0<br />

9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y Simulation of maximum display Y 0<br />

9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA Simulation of maximum display area 1000<br />

9626 $MM_CTM_TRACE Settings in <strong>ShopMill</strong> 1<br />

9650 $MM_CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Position of coordinate system 0<br />

9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT Tool management concepts 4<br />

9652 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL Tool monitoring 1<br />

9653 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS Enabling 4th axis for user interface 0<br />

9654 $MM_CMM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES Number of decimal places in the speed input<br />

field<br />

0<br />

9655 $MM_CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST Lifting amount for deep hole drilling 1.0<br />

9656 $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST Lifting amount for boring 0.1<br />

9657 $MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_CONT_PO_TO_RAD Indication of variation of the smallest possible<br />

cutter radius in %<br />

5<br />

9658 $MM_CMM_CYC_MAX_CONT_PO_TO_RAD Indication of variation of the largest possible<br />

cutter radius<br />

0.01<br />

9659 $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_ANGLE Tool orientation angle on retraction 0.0<br />

12.01<br />

9660 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_PLANE_CHANGE Changing to machining plane (G17, G18, G19) 1<br />

9661 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CO- Number of input fields for customized M com- 0<br />

DES<br />

mands<br />

9662 $MM_CMM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS Number of gear steps 1<br />

9663 $MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM Display radius/diameter for tool 1<br />

9664 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN Max. feed in mm/min 10000.0<br />

9665 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT Max. feed in mm/rev 1.0<br />

9666 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH Max. feed in mm/tooth 1.0<br />

9667 $MM_CMM_FOLLOW_ON_TOOL_ACTIVE Tool preselection active 1<br />

9668 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II M code coolants I and II ( -1 = no M code) - 1<br />

9669 $MM_CMM_FACE_MILL_EFF_TOOL_DIAM Effective mill diameter for face milling 85.0<br />

9670 $MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKE Radius of approach circle for finishing cut on<br />

contour pockets plus half the final machining<br />

allowance ( -1 = safety clearance)<br />

- 1.0<br />

9672 $MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE Fixed location coding 0<br />

9673 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION Number of loading station 1<br />

9674 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE Display of magazine list 1<br />

9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE Customer power-up display 0<br />

9676 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 Path for drive names in directory management C:\NC_Files<br />

9677 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2 Path for drive names in directory management -<br />

9678 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3 Path for drive names in directory management -<br />

9679 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4 Path for drive names in directory management -<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

MD<br />

No.<br />

MD identifier<br />

Comment<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9680 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I M code for coolant I 8<br />

9681 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II M code for coolant II 7<br />

9682 $MM_CMM_CYC_BGF_BORE_DIST Preboring depth for drill and thread milling 1<br />

9684 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1 M code for tool-specific bits 1 90<br />

9685 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2 M code for tool-specific bits 2 91<br />

9686 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_OFF M code for coolant OFF 9<br />

9703 $MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_4 Axis index for 4th axis 0<br />

9704 $MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_5 Axis index for 5th axis 0<br />

9705 $MM_CMM_INDEX_SPINDLE Axis index for spindle 4<br />

Preset<br />

default<br />

9719 $MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK Settings for <strong>ShopMill</strong> H7001<br />

9720 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS B axis enable signal 0<br />

9721 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL Enable signal for cylinder peripheral surface<br />

transformation<br />

0<br />

9723 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELING_HEAD Enable swiveling heads 0<br />

9724 $MM_CMM_CIRCLE_RAPID_FEED Rapid traverse feed for positioning on circular<br />

path<br />

5000<br />

9750 $MM_CMM_MEAS_PROBE_INPUT Measuring input for a workpiece probe 0<br />

9751 $MM_CMM_MEAS_T_PROBE_INPUT Measuring input for tool probe 1<br />

9752 $MM_CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE Maximum measurement path (before and after<br />

the measuring point) for automatic measurement<br />

in the program.<br />

5<br />

9753 $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN Maximum measurement path for manual measurement<br />

(before and after the measuring<br />

point)<br />

10<br />

9754 $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH Maximum measurement path for tool length<br />

(before and after measuring point)<br />

2<br />

9755 $MM_CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS Maximum measurement path for tool radius<br />

(before and after measuring point)<br />

1<br />

9756 $MM_CMM_MEASURING_FEED Measuring feed 300<br />

9757 $MM_CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL Feed in the plane with collision monitoring 1000<br />

9758 $MM_CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL Infeed with collision monitoring 1000<br />

9759 $MM_CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP Max. circumferential velocity for tool measurement<br />

with rotating spindle<br />

100<br />

9760 $MM_CMM_SPIND_SPEED_ROT_SP Max. speed for tool measurement with rotating<br />

spindle<br />

1000<br />

9761 $MM_CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP Minimum feed for tool measurement with rotating<br />

spindle<br />

10<br />

9762 $MM_CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP Measuring accuracy for tool measurements<br />

with rotating spindle<br />

0.01<br />

9763 $MM_CMM_TOOL_PROBE_TYPE Type of tool probe 0<br />

9764 $MM_CMM_TOOL_PROBE_ALLOWS_AXIS Permissible axis directions for tool probe<br />

(ZYX)<br />

133<br />

9765 $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEA Diameter of tool probe for length measurement 0<br />

9766 $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS Diameter of tool probe for radius measurement 0<br />

9767 $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS Infeed from top edge of tool probe for radius<br />

measurement<br />

0<br />

9768 $MM_CMM_T_PROBE_APPROACH_DIR Plane approach direction, tool at tool probe - 1<br />

6-73


6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

6.2.2 Description of display machine data<br />

9478 $MM_TO_OPTION_MASK<br />

MD number Settings for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0000 Max. input limit: FFFF<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 1 Unit: Hex<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.2, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.2<br />

Meaning: Bit0: Input extensions for <strong>ShopMill</strong> (cooling water, etc.)<br />

Bit1: Reserved<br />

Bit2: Reserved<br />

Bit3: Creation of new tools directly in a magazine location not allowed<br />

Bit4: Reserved<br />

Bit5: Reserved<br />

Bit6: Reserved<br />

Bit7: Input disable for loaded tools (wear data excepted)<br />

Bit8: Evaluate file to_mill.ini<br />

Bit9: No loading/unloading when program is running<br />

Bit10: Compute tool wear inputs additively<br />

Bit11: Spare<br />

9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X<br />

MD number Simulation of default value X<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: -10000 Max. input limit: 10000<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the size of the X coordinate of the display area. When you press softkey<br />

TO ORIGIN in simulation mode, you will go to the value set in this MD.<br />

Corresponding to ... MD 9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y<br />

MD 9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA<br />

9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y<br />

MD number Simulation of default value Y<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: -10000 Max. input limit: 10000<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the size of the Y coordinate of the display area. When you press softkey<br />

TO ORIGIN in simulation mode, you will go to the value set in this MD.<br />

Corresponding to ... MD 9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X<br />

MD 9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA<br />

6-74<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9602 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA<br />

MD number Simulation of default display area<br />

Default setting: 100 Min. input limit: -10000 Max. input limit: 10000<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the size of the display area above the X coordinate. The Y coordinate is<br />

calculated automatically from this setting.<br />

Corresponding to ... MD 9600 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X<br />

MD 9601 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y<br />

9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X<br />

MD number Simulation of maximum display X<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: -10000 Max. input limit: 10000<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the size of the X coordinate of a second display area (e.g. for larger workpieces).<br />

When you press softkey MAX in simulation mode, the value preset in this MD will apply.<br />

Corresponding to ... MD 9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y<br />

MD 9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA<br />

9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y<br />

MD number Simulation of maximum display Y<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: -10000 Max. input limit: 10000<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the size of the Y coordinate of a second display area.<br />

When you press softkey MAX in simulation mode, the value preset in this MD will apply.<br />

Corresponding to ... MD 9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X<br />

MD 9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA<br />

9605 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA<br />

MD number Simulation of maximum display area<br />

Default setting: 1000 Min. input limit: -10000 Max. input limit: 10000<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This machine data defines the second display area above the X coordinate. The Y coordinate<br />

is calculated automatically from this setting.<br />

Corresponding to ... MD 9603 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X<br />

MD 9604 $MM_CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y<br />

6-75


6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9626 $MM_CTM_TRACE<br />

MD number Settings in <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0000 Max. input limit: FFFF<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: Hex<br />

Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.2, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.2<br />

Meaning: Bit 0: Display of /xy version<br />

Bits 1 to 13: Reserved<br />

Bit 14: Calculation of ZO data in current ZO if bit 14== 0<br />

6-76<br />

12.01<br />

9650 $MM_CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM<br />

MD number Position of coordinate system<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 47<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: You can use this MD to match the coordinate system of the operator interface to that of the<br />

machine.<br />

The coordinate system can assume the following positions:<br />

+Z<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+Z<br />

0 +X 1 +Z<br />

2 +Y<br />

3<br />

+Z<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

4<br />

+X<br />

5 +Z 6<br />

+X<br />

+Y 7<br />

+Y +Z<br />

+X<br />

+Z +X<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

8 +Y 9 +X<br />

10 +Z<br />

+Y<br />

11<br />

+X<br />

+X<br />

+Z +Y<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

12<br />

+Y<br />

13 +X 14<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

15<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

16 +Z 17 +Y<br />

18 +X<br />

+Z<br />

19<br />

+Y<br />

+Y<br />

+X +Z<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+Z<br />

20<br />

+Z<br />

21 +Y 22 +X<br />

23<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

+X


12.01<br />

9650 $MM_CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM<br />

MD number Position of coordinate system<br />

+Y<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

24 +X 25 +Y<br />

26<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

27<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

+X<br />

+X<br />

28 29 +Y 30 +Z 31<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+Z<br />

32 +Z 33 +X<br />

34<br />

+Y<br />

35<br />

+X<br />

+Z<br />

+Z<br />

+Z<br />

36 37 +X 38 +Y 39<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

40<br />

+Y<br />

41 +Z<br />

42 +X<br />

+Y<br />

43<br />

+Z<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+Z<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+Y<br />

44<br />

+Y<br />

45<br />

Note:<br />

+Z 46<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

47<br />

+X<br />

+Z<br />

In the <strong>ShopMill</strong> user interface all help screens, sequence graphs, simulation and input fields<br />

with circle direction indication change automatically according to the selected position.<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+Z<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+Z<br />

+Z<br />

+Y<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+X<br />

+X<br />

+Z +Y<br />

9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT<br />

MD number Tool management concepts<br />

Default setting: 2 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 4<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: Selection of one of two tool management variants (see Section 9 “Tool Management”):<br />

2: Tool management with loading/unloading<br />

4: Tool management without loading/unloading<br />

+X<br />

+Y<br />

+Z<br />

+Z<br />

6-77


6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

6-78<br />

12.01<br />

9652 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL<br />

MD number Tool monitoring<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD activates the tool monitoring. The tool monitoring function monitors the tool life and<br />

tool loading operations:<br />

0=Tool monitoring is not displayed<br />

1=Tool monitoring is displayed<br />

9653 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS<br />

MD number Enabling 4th axis for user interface<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 3<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: Enable 4th axis (e.g. A axis) for user interface:<br />

0 = 4th axis is not displayed on the user interface<br />

1 = 4th axis is displayed on the user interface<br />

2 = 4th axis is displayed on the user interface and can be programmed<br />

3 = 4th axis is displayed on the user interface only for reference point approach<br />

9654 $MM_CMM_SPEED_FIELD_DISPLAY_RES<br />

MD number Number of decimal places in the speed input field<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 4<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD is for defining the number of decimal places in parameter field S (speed).<br />

9655 $MM_CMM_CYC_PECKING_DIST<br />

MD number Lifting amount for deep hole drilling<br />

Default setting: 1.0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 100.0<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the retraction distance for deep hole drilling with chip break.<br />

9656 $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_DIST<br />

MD number Lifting amount for boring<br />

Default setting: 0.1 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 10.0<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the clearance distance traveled by the tool in the X direction during hole<br />

boring operations.<br />

Note:<br />

-1 means that the value of the retraction distance D can be entered in the operator<br />

interface.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9657 $MM_CMM_CYC_MIN_CONT_PO_TO_RAD<br />

MD number Indication of variation of the smallest possible cutter radius in %<br />

Default setting: 5 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 50<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: %<br />

Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD is required for contour pocket milling. This parameter is for defining by which percentage<br />

the radius of a cutter used may be smaller than the one which was used for generating.<br />

9658 $MM_CMM_CYC_MAX_CONT_PO_TO_RAD<br />

MD number Indication of variation of the greatest possible cutter radius<br />

Default setting: 0.01 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 10.0<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD is required for contour pocket milling. This parameter is for defining by which<br />

amount the radius of a cutter used may be greater than the one which was used for generating.<br />

9659 $MM_CMM_CYC_DRILL_RELEASE_ANGLE<br />

MD number Tool orientation angle on retraction<br />

Default setting: 0.0 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 360<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: degrees<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the spindle position (0...360_) at which the tool comes to a standstill, e.g.<br />

drill toolholder in a hole.<br />

Note:<br />

-1 means that the value for the tool orientation angle can be input in the operator interface.<br />

9660 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_PLANE_CHANGE<br />

MD number Changing to machining plane (G17, G18, G19)<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: Enable change to machining plane (G17, G18, G19):<br />

0 = Change to machining plane (G17, G18, G19) not possible<br />

1 = Change to machining plane (G17, G18, G19) possible<br />

6-79


6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9661 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES<br />

MD number Number of input fields for customized M commands<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 4<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD activates the number of input fields for customized M commands:<br />

6-80<br />

0 = No display fields for customized M commands<br />

1 = 1 field for one customized M command is displayed<br />

2 = 2 fields for 2 customized M commands are displayed<br />

3 = 3 fields for 3 customized M commands are displayed<br />

4 = 4 fields for 4 customized M commands are displayed<br />

9662 $MM_CMM_COUNT_GEAR_STEPS<br />

MD number Number of gear steps<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 5<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD is for setting the number of gear steps (0 to 5) for the spindle. The possibility of<br />

input in the user interface is thus restricted.<br />

9663 $MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM<br />

MD number Display radius/diameter for tool<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines how the tool is displayed or is to be input:<br />

0 = Radius<br />

1 = Diameter<br />

9664 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_MIN<br />

MD number Max. feed in mm/min<br />

Default setting: 10000.0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 100000.0<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD is for entering the upper feedrate input limit for mm/min.<br />

9665 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_ROT<br />

MD number Max. feed in mm/rev<br />

Default setting: 1.0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 10.0<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/rev<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD is for entering the upper feedrate input limit for mm/rev.<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9666 $MM_CMM_MAX_INP_FEED_P_TOOTH<br />

MD number Max. feed in mm/tooth<br />

Default setting: 1.0 Min. input limit: 0.0 Max. input limit: 5.0<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/tooth<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD is for entering the upper feedrate input limit for mm/tooth.<br />

9667 $MM_CMM_FOLLOW_ON_TOOL_ACTIVE<br />

MD number Tool preselection active<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines whether a tool preselection is active in a magazine (e.g. chain magazine),<br />

i.e. the following tool is already brought to the load station for a pending tool change.<br />

0 = Tool preselection is not active<br />

1 = Tool preselection is active<br />

9668 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II<br />

MD number M code coolants I and II ( -1 = no M code)<br />

Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 32767<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Meaning: This machine data enables you to specify the M code if both coolants I and II are activated<br />

simultaneously in the tool list.<br />

Value:<br />

-1 = No M code<br />

xy = Mxy for coolant I and II on (xy = value of MD 9668)<br />

9669 $MM_CMM_FACE_MILL_EFF_TOOL_DIAM<br />

MD number Effective mill diameter for face milling<br />

Default setting: 85.0 Min. input limit: 50.0 Max. input limit: 100.0<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: %<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Meaning: This MD specifies the effective mill diameter for face milling. The ratio d/D > MD 9669<br />

(where d = cut diameter, D = largest mill diameter) defines how far the mill goes beyond the<br />

workpiece during face milling.<br />

9670 $MM_CMM_START_RAD_CONTOUR_POCKE<br />

MD number Radius of approach circle for finishing cut on contour pockets plus half the final machining<br />

allowance ( -1 = safety clearance)<br />

Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: -1 Max. input limit: 100.0<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Meaning: This MD affects the radius of the approach circle when finishing contour pockets.<br />

-1 = The radius is selected such that the safety clearance for final machining is observed at<br />

the start point.<br />

>0 = The radius is selected such that the value of this MD for final machining allowance is<br />

observed at the start point.<br />

6-81


6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9672 $MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE<br />

MD number Fixed location coding<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the state of the tools:<br />

0 = Tools with flexible locations in the magazine<br />

1 = Tools with fixed locations in the magazine<br />

9673 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION<br />

MD number Number of loading station<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 2<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Meaning: This MD enables you to specify the loading station used to load and unload the magazine.<br />

1 = Loading station 1<br />

2 = Loading station 2<br />

9674 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE<br />

MD number Display of magazine list<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

Meaning: 0 = Magazine list is not displayed<br />

1 = Magazine list is displayed<br />

9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE<br />

MD number Customer power-up display<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4<br />

with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: Customer power-up display is activated if<br />

0 = Siemens-configured customer power-up display<br />

1 = Customer-configured customer power-up display<br />

6-82<br />

12.01<br />

9676 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1<br />

MD number Path for drive names in directory management<br />

Default setting: C:\NC_Files Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: STRING (80 characters) Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 2nd softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in<br />

the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a<br />

blank string is entered in the display machine data.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9677 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2<br />

MD number Path for drive names in directory management<br />

Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: STRING (80 characters) Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 3rd softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in<br />

the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a<br />

blank string is entered in the display machine data.<br />

9678 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3<br />

MD number Path for drive names in directory management<br />

Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: STRING (80 characters) Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 4th softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in<br />

the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a<br />

blank string is entered in the display machine data.<br />

9679 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4<br />

MD number Path for drive names in directory management<br />

Default setting: - Min. input limit: - Max. input limit: -<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: STRING (80 characters) Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the path for the drive name of the 5th softkey (horizontal softkey menu) in<br />

the directory management with hard disk network link. The softkey is not displayed if a<br />

blank string is entered in the display machine data.<br />

9680 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I<br />

MD number M code for coolant I<br />

Default setting: 8 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32767<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: This MD is set to define the M code for coolant I. This code is output when the tool is<br />

changed.<br />

9681 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II<br />

MD number M code for coolant II<br />

Default setting: 7 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32767<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: WORD Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: This MD is set to define the M code for coolant II. This code is output when the tool is<br />

changed.<br />

6-83


6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9682 $MM_CMM_CYC_BGF_BORE_DIST<br />

MD number Preboring depth for drill and thread milling<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.3 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 6.2<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the preboring depth for drill and thread milling.<br />

9684 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1<br />

MD number M code for tool-specific bits 1<br />

Default setting: 90 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32767<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.3 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 6.2<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the M code for tool-specific bits 1.<br />

Please note that the same setting must be made in interface signal DB82.DBB12<br />

ext_m_cmd_1 (see also Chapter 7 “Reservations”).<br />

9685 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2<br />

MD number M code for tool-specific bits 2<br />

Default setting: 91 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32767<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.3with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 6.2<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the M code for tool-specific bits 2.<br />

Please note that the same setting must be made in interface signal DB82.DBB13<br />

ext_m_cmd_2 (see also Chapter 7 “Reservations”).<br />

6-84<br />

12.01<br />

9686 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_OFF<br />

MD number M code for coolant OFF<br />

Default setting: 9 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32767<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.3 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 6.2<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the M code for switching off the coolant. This code is output when the tool<br />

is changed.<br />

9703 $MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_4<br />

MD number Axis index for 4th axis<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 127<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: UBYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 5.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 3.3<br />

Meaning: The number of the channel axis is entered in this MD.<br />

9704 $MM_CMM_INDEX_AXIS_5<br />

MD number Axis index for 5th axis<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 127<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: UBYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 5.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 3.3<br />

Meaning: The number of the channel axis is entered in this MD.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9705 $MM_CMM_INDEX_SPINDLE<br />

MD number Axis index for spindle<br />

Default setting: 4 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 127<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: UBYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 5.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 3.3<br />

Meaning: The number of the channel axis is entered in this MD.<br />

9719 $MM_CMM_OPTION_MASK<br />

MD number Settings for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Default setting: H7001 Min. input limit: 0000 Max. input limit: FFFF<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 1 Unit: Hex<br />

Data type: LONG Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.2, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.2<br />

Meaning: Bit0: Display “<strong>ShopMill</strong>” softkey when creating new programs.<br />

Bit1: Spare<br />

Bit2: MDI buffer is not deleted automatically.<br />

Bit3: Spare<br />

Bit4: Spare<br />

Bit5: Spare<br />

Bit6: Spare<br />

Bit7: Spare<br />

Bit8: Direct switchover to PCU 50 by means of extended operating area changeover<br />

(SM Open)<br />

Bit9: Program start in all screens<br />

Bit10: Reserved<br />

Bit11: Spare<br />

Bit12: Spare<br />

Bit13: Spare<br />

Bit14: Reserved<br />

Bit15: Reserved<br />

Bit16: Reserved<br />

Bit17: Reserved<br />

Bit18: On switchover from JOG/MDI/Auto, change the operating mode, but do not branch<br />

to Machine<br />

Bit19: The text Machine and Workpiece is used instead of MCS and WCS<br />

Bit20: Display WO as WO1 or G54<br />

Bit21: Enable basic block display<br />

9720 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS<br />

MD number B axis enable signal<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 3<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: Enable 5th axis (e.g. B axis) for user interface:<br />

0 = 5th axis is not displayed on the user interface<br />

1 = 5th axis is displayed on the user interface<br />

2 = 5th axis is displayed on the user interface and can be programmed<br />

3 = 5th axis is displayed on the user interface only for reference point approach<br />

6-85


6Machine Data<br />

6.2 Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

9721 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL<br />

MD number Enable signal for cylinder peripheral surface transformation<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: Activate the cylinder peripheral surface transformation function via the operator interface:<br />

6-86<br />

12.01<br />

0 = The cylinder peripheral surface transformation function is not displayed on the operator<br />

interface.<br />

1 = The cylinder peripheral surface transformation function is displayed on the operator<br />

interface.<br />

The cylinder peripheral surface transformation function can be used only if it has been started<br />

up as a standard function.<br />

References: /FB2/, M1, Kinematic Transformations<br />

9723 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELLING_HEAD<br />

MD number Enable swivelling heads<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.4, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.4 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 5.1<br />

Meaning: This MD can be set to select whether or not swivel heads can be used on the machine.<br />

0 = No screenforms supporting swivel heads are made available.<br />

1 = Screenforms supporting swivel heads are made available.<br />

9724 $MM_CMM_CIRCLE_RAPID_FEED<br />

MD number Rapid traverse feed for positioning on circular path<br />

Default setting: 5000 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100000<br />

Changes valid from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of software version:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 6.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 4.3 with <strong>ShopMill</strong> SW 6.2<br />

Meaning: Use this MD to set the rapid traverse feed in mm/min for positioning on a circular path.<br />

Note<br />

For a description of the display machine data for measuring cycles, please<br />

refer to Section 10.5 “Machine data for execution of measuring cycles”.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

J


Reserved Functions<br />

M functions<br />

The following functions are utilized by <strong>ShopMill</strong> and must not be assigned for<br />

other purposes.<br />

M functions with extended address:<br />

M[value]=90<br />

M[value]=91<br />

M90 and M91 are defaults and must be changed where required.<br />

1. extended M address:<br />

DB82.DBB12 ext_m_cmd_1, default=90<br />

Display MD 9684 CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_1, default=90<br />

2. extended M address:<br />

DB82.DBB13 ext_m_cmd_2, default=91<br />

Display MD 9685 CMM_M_CODE_TOOL_BITS_2, default=91<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

7<br />

J<br />

7-87


7 Reserved Functions<br />

7-88<br />

Notes<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


Tools<br />

Operating<br />

sequence<br />

In <strong>ShopMill</strong> the tool change is initiated by a tool-changing cycle. This cycle is<br />

called by the <strong>ShopMill</strong> cycles where a tool can be programmed.<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> tool change cycle performs the following tasks:<br />

1. Deactivate compensation of the active tool<br />

2. Select new tool<br />

(from the programmed cycle screen)<br />

3. Call tool change cycle L6<br />

Note: Tool change cycle L6 is called with M6.<br />

4. Output of tool-specific functions depending on the setting in the<br />

relevant column of the tool table<br />

S Number of teeth<br />

S M3/M4/M5 from column “Spindle right/left/off”<br />

S M7 from the “Coolant 1 on/off” column<br />

S M8 from the “Coolant 2 on/off” column<br />

S Tool-specific M functions 1...4 from the columns<br />

“Tool-spec. fct. 1”, “Tool- spec. fct. 2”, “Tool-spec. fct. 3”,<br />

“Tool-spec. fct. 4”<br />

5. Select tool edge D1 or D2<br />

(tool edge number from programmed cycle screen)<br />

6. Preselect next tool<br />

(is automatically entered by the <strong>ShopMill</strong> programming)<br />

Fig. 8-1 <strong>ShopMill</strong> tool change cycle<br />

Note<br />

The tool-specific functions (number of teeth, spindle, coolant, M functions) are<br />

stored in cutting edge parameter 25 ($TC_DP25).<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

8<br />

8-89


8 Tools<br />

8.1 Tool-changing cycle adapting to the machine<br />

8.1 Tool-changing cycle adapting to the machine<br />

General<br />

Example<br />

8-90<br />

12.01<br />

You need to create a tool change cycle, e.g. L6, for the machine-specific parts<br />

of the tool change.<br />

Example L6.SPF in the toolbox shows how to do this. This example requires:<br />

S MD 22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=1<br />

Tool is changed via an M function.<br />

S MD 10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[0]=6<br />

M function (M6) used to call the tool change, i.e. the subroutine assigned via<br />

MD 10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[0].<br />

S MD 10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[0]=”L6”<br />

Name of the subroutine (L6) to be executed after the M function defined in<br />

MD 10715.<br />

If the subroutine name is to be entered by means of program or MDI, the<br />

name must be enclosed in quotation marks. This does not apply to manual<br />

inputs.<br />

S MD 22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE=206<br />

M function (M206) with which the tool change is defined for the tool management.<br />

The machine data specified above can be found in the tool box in machine data<br />

set CMM.8X0.<br />

PROC L6 SAVE<br />

.<br />

.;______________________________________________________<br />

;Example tool change cycle for machine manufacturer<br />

;_______________________________________________________<br />

DEF INT _WZ_IN_SP,_WZ_VOR<br />

;<br />

STOPRE ; Preprocessing stop<br />

;<br />

IF (NOT $P_SEARCH) ; if no block search<br />

_WZ_IN_SP=$TC_MPP6[9998,1] ; Tool in spindle<br />

GETSELT(_WZ_VOR) ; Preselected tool<br />

;<br />

IF (_WZ_IN_SP_WZ_VOR) ; if another tool<br />

; Position spindle:<br />

SPOS=...<br />

; Approach tool change position:<br />

SUPA D0 G0 G90 G40 G60 Z=...<br />

ENDIF<br />

ENDIF<br />

;<br />

;Change tool: Tool management and PLC<br />

M206<br />

STOPRE ; Preprocessing stop<br />

M17<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Explanation of<br />

example<br />

Note<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

8 Tools<br />

8.1 Tool-changing cycle adapting to the machine<br />

Values must be entered after “SPOS=” and “Z=” in the sample tool change<br />

cycle L6 above.<br />

Tool change cycle L6 contains the following steps:<br />

1. Spindle positioning<br />

2. Approaching tool change positions in the machine coordinate system<br />

3. Execute tool change (M206)<br />

The tool must be at a safe height after tool change so that all motions in the<br />

plane are permissible!<br />

8-91


8 Tools<br />

8.2 Manual tools<br />

8.2 Manual tools<br />

8-92<br />

12.01<br />

Manual tools are tools which are required during machining, but are only available<br />

in the tool list but not in the tool-holding magazine. These tools must be attached/detached<br />

manually to/from the spindle.<br />

Machine data 22562 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE, bit1=1,<br />

can be set to allow tools without a magazine location assignment to be selected<br />

for tool changes.<br />

An alarm is output every time the manual tool is loaded, unloaded or replaced.<br />

(E.g. “Channel 1, manual tool mill20, duplo no. 1 load to toolholder 1.” i.e. the<br />

manual tool mill20 must be attached to the spindle.)<br />

Manual tools are identified by magazine location 1 in magazine 9999 in the interface<br />

to the PLC. Bit5 in DB72 DBB (n+0) is set to load the tool and bit6 to<br />

unload it.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

8.3 Switching on spindle and coolant<br />

Modifying the<br />

cursor texts<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

8 Tools<br />

8.3 Switching on spindle and coolant<br />

The functions spindle direction (right/left/off) and coolant can be assigned to a<br />

tool.<br />

Cursor texts: “Spindle ri/le/off” “Coolant 1/2<br />

on/off”<br />

Fig. 8-2 Tool list: Coolant and spindle direction of rotation<br />

Make the assignment between the coolant and the appropriate M commands in<br />

the following machine data:<br />

MD 9680 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I<br />

MD 9681 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_II<br />

MD 9668 $MM_CMM_M_CODE_COOLANT_I_AND_II<br />

The cursor texts (“Spindle ri/le/off, coolant 1/2 on/off”) are stored in the<br />

CUST.TXT file and can be modified (see Section 8.5 “Modifying cursor texts for<br />

tool-specific functions”).<br />

8-93


8 Tools<br />

8.4 Activate tool-specific M functions 1...4<br />

8.4 Activate tool-specific M functions 1...4<br />

Example<br />

8-94<br />

12.01<br />

The tool-specific M functions 1...4 are intended for further machine functions,<br />

which can be activated for a tool. For example, third coolant, speed monitoring,<br />

tool break, etc.<br />

Fig. 8-3 Tool list: Tool-specific functions 1...4<br />

Cursor texts: “Tool-spec. fct. 1...4”<br />

The fields in the tool list can be grayed out with the display MD 9661,<br />

CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES = 0.<br />

The tool-specific M functions 1...4 are output by the <strong>ShopMill</strong> tool change cycle<br />

after M6 for a PLC cycle in DB82.<br />

Tool-specific M function 1 ... 4 in DB82:<br />

DB82 DBX42.0 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_on<br />

DB82 DBX42.1 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_on<br />

DB82 DBX42.2 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_on<br />

DB82 DBX42.3 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_on<br />

DB82 DBX42.4 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_1_active<br />

DB82 DBX42.5 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_2_active<br />

DB82 DBX42.6 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_3_active<br />

DB82 DBX42.7 CMM_OUT.tool_m_function.function_4_active<br />

Bits DB82.DBX42.4...7 indicates whether the function displayed in bits<br />

DB82.DBX42.0...3 is valid. The signal is low active.<br />

The following functions are programmed:<br />

Tool-specific M_function 1: On<br />

Tool-specific M_function 2: No change<br />

Tool-specific M_function 3: Off<br />

Tool-specific M_function 4: No change<br />

M command M90=161 is generated. The following bits are set in DB82.DBB42:<br />

Table 8-1 DB82.DBB42<br />

Bit Status Function<br />

0 1 Activate tool-specific M function 1<br />

1 0 No change in tool-specific M function 2<br />

2 0 Deactivate tool-specific M function 3<br />

3 0 No change in tool-specific M function 4<br />

4 0 Accept function from bit0<br />

5 1 Do not accept function from bit1<br />

6 0 Accept function from bit2<br />

7 1 Do not accept function from bit3<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Special features in<br />

“MANUAL” mode<br />

Modifying the<br />

cursor texts<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

8 Tools<br />

8.4 Activate tool-specific M functions 1...4<br />

In “MANUAL” mode, no tool-specific M functions are output to the PLC. On tool<br />

change in the “MANUAL” mode, these functions can be initiated by the operator<br />

using the keys on the machine control panel (implementation via PLC user program).<br />

The cursor texts (“Tool-specific function 1, ...”) are stored in the CUST.TXT file<br />

and can be modified (see Section 8.5 “Modifying texts for tool-specific functions”).<br />

Note<br />

Tool-specific M functions are output from the HMI to the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC using M<br />

functions with extended address (see Chapter 7 “Reservations”).<br />

8-95


8 Tools<br />

8.5 Modify texts for tool-specific functions<br />

8.5 Modify texts for tool-specific functions<br />

8.5.1 PCU 20<br />

Text numbers<br />

Language<br />

assignment<br />

8-96<br />

12.01<br />

For tool-specific functions, you can modify the parameter texts in the operation<br />

area Program -- linear/circular, “Machine functions” menu and the cursor texts in<br />

the tool list. Cursor texts are texts, shown in the message line when the cursor<br />

is positioned on the relevant input field.<br />

You can use the aluc.txt text file on the application diskette to modify the texts of<br />

the tool-specific functions.<br />

The texts are assigned to the following text numbers in the file “aluc.txt”:<br />

Table 8-2 Text assignment<br />

Cursor texts in the “Tool list” menu Text number<br />

Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1) 89911<br />

Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2) 89912<br />

Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3) 89913<br />

Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4) 89914<br />

Coolant 1 89921<br />

Coolant 2<br />

Parameter texts in the<br />

“Program straight line/circle machine function” menu<br />

89922<br />

Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1) 89915<br />

Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2) 89916<br />

Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3) 89917<br />

Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4) 89918<br />

Coolant 1 89919<br />

Coolant 2 89920<br />

This means that text numbers 89911 and 89915 etc. refer to the same functions.<br />

Note<br />

The maximum number of character is 23 for the cursor texts and 14 for the<br />

parameter texts.<br />

Each language directory contains a file named “aluc.txt”.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Example<br />

Procedure<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

8 Tools<br />

8.5 Modify texts for tool-specific functions<br />

The cursor text “Tool-spec. function 1” in the tool list should be changed to ”Air<br />

cooling”.<br />

You must make the following entry in file ”aluc.txt”:<br />

89911 0 0 ”Air cooling”<br />

The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text<br />

output and must always be set to 0.<br />

To select file aluc.txt, proceed as follows:<br />

S Switch to the subdirectory ...\instutil in the application environment.<br />

S Call the APP_INST program.<br />

S Select ”Modify configuration”.<br />

S Specify whether the texts for the 1st or 2nd language are to be edited:<br />

”Edit text files for first language” or<br />

”Edit text files for second language”.<br />

S Scroll through the menu until the option ”alarm texts for user cycles”<br />

appears and then enter the corresponding number.<br />

This opens the text file ALUC.TXT with the DOS editor ”edit”.<br />

S Enter the texts of your choice.<br />

S Save the file and close the editor.<br />

S Press the ”ESC” key twice.<br />

The text modifications become operative when you take the following steps:<br />

S Select ”Install all modules on hardware”.<br />

S Confirm your language selection with “F4 Accept”.<br />

S Select ”Create Flash Memory Card image”.<br />

S Specify the source drive for the system disks.<br />

S Specify the target path for the system disks.<br />

S Enter the target drive to which the file must be saved.<br />

S Specify the target path for the file.<br />

S Use SINUCOPY to create a PC card (see Subsection 2.2.1 Start-up on a<br />

PCU 20).<br />

S Load the PC card contents to the control (see Subsection 2.2.1 Start-up on<br />

a PCU 20).<br />

8-97


8 Tools<br />

8.5 Modify texts for tool-specific functions<br />

8.5.2 PCU 50<br />

Text numbers<br />

Language<br />

assignment<br />

8-98<br />

12.01<br />

For tool-specific functions, you can modify the parameter texts in the operation<br />

area Program -- linear/circular, “Machine functions” menu and the cursor texts in<br />

the tool list. Cursor texts are texts, shown in the message line when the cursor<br />

is positioned on the relevant input field.<br />

The desired texts must be entered in the text file C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_xx.com. The<br />

file “aluc_xx.com” may have to be created in directory “cus.dir”.<br />

Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file C:\user\mbdde.ini:<br />

UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_<br />

The texts are assigned to the following text numbers in the file “aluc_xx.com”:<br />

Table 8-3 Text assignment<br />

Cursor texts in the “Tool list” menu Text number<br />

Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1) 89911<br />

Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2) 89912<br />

Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3) 89913<br />

Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4) 89914<br />

Coolant 1 89921<br />

Coolant 2<br />

Parameter texts in the<br />

“Program straight line/circle machine function” menu<br />

89922<br />

Tool-specific function 1 (tool-spec. fct. 1) 89915<br />

Tool-specific function 2 (tool-spec. fct. 2) 89916<br />

Tool-specific function 3 (tool-spec. fct. 3) 89917<br />

Tool-specific function 4 (tool-spec. fct. 4) 89918<br />

Coolant 1 89919<br />

Coolant 2 89920<br />

This means that text numbers 89911 and 89915 etc. refer to the same functions.<br />

Note<br />

The maximum number of character is 23 for the cursor texts and 14 for the<br />

parameter texts.<br />

The text language is assigned on the basis of the text file name. “xx” is replaced<br />

by one of the following abbreviations in the text file name:<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Example<br />

Table 8-4 Language assignment<br />

Abbreviation<br />

xx<br />

Language<br />

gr German<br />

uk English<br />

fr French<br />

it Italian<br />

sp Spanish<br />

nl Dutch<br />

fi Finnish<br />

sw Swedish<br />

pl Polish<br />

tr Turkish<br />

ch Czech<br />

tw Taiwan Chinese<br />

ko Korean<br />

hu Hungarian<br />

po Portuguese<br />

ru Cyrillic<br />

cz Czech<br />

yes Japanese<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

8 Tools<br />

8.5 Modify texts for tool-specific functions<br />

The cursor text “Tool-spec. function 1” in the tool list should be changed to ”Air<br />

cooling”.<br />

You must make the following entry in file ”aluc_gr.com”:<br />

89911 0 0 ”Air cooling”<br />

The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text<br />

output and must always be set to 0.<br />

Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file C:\user\mbdde.ini:<br />

UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_<br />

J<br />

8-99


8 Tools<br />

8.5 Modify texts for tool-specific functions<br />

8-100<br />

Notes<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


Tool Management<br />

9.1 Overview of functions<br />

Option<br />

Data<br />

Operation<br />

Programming<br />

PLC<br />

Tools<br />

Replacement tools<br />

Magazine<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> only runs when the tool management option is set. It is shipped with<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> as standard. The option is already set in the standard machine data<br />

record for <strong>ShopMill</strong>.<br />

References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management<br />

Data storage and management is carried out in the NC. All data can be read<br />

and written manually, via the NC program or by data transfer.<br />

Operation is performed via system displays.<br />

Tool management enables you to call the tool by name, e.g. “Mill 120 mm”.<br />

The tool call is still possible via the T No. (tool number). The T No. is then the<br />

name of the tool.<br />

Separate PLC modules are available for tool management to handle the communication<br />

between NC and PLC.<br />

A maximum of 250 tools can be set up on the PCU 20; on the PCU 50, the maximum<br />

number of tools is limited by MD 18082 $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL.<br />

A total of 98 replacement tools can be set up for each tool.<br />

Chain and disk-type magazines can be managed. The maximum number of<br />

magazines is set in the NC.<br />

Display MD 9674 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE can be set to conceal<br />

the magazine list.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9<br />

9-101


9ToolManagement 9.1 Overview of functions<br />

Location coding<br />

Disabling<br />

magazine<br />

locations<br />

Monitoring<br />

functions<br />

Tool management<br />

without<br />

Load/Unload<br />

Tool management<br />

with<br />

Load/Unload<br />

Loading<br />

Unloading<br />

Sorting<br />

Manual tools<br />

9-102<br />

Display MD 9672 $MM_CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE determines whether all<br />

tools have a fixed or variable location coding.<br />

12.01<br />

S Fixed assignment (MD 9672, value 1) means that the tool is permanently<br />

assigned to a magazine location. This concept can be used for machines<br />

with disk-type magazine.<br />

S For variable location assignment (MD 9672, value 0), a tool with a tool number<br />

or tool name can be returned to a different magazine location from its<br />

original one. This concept can be used for machines with chain magazine.<br />

You can set individual tools to “fixed-location-coded” in the operator interface<br />

(tool wear).<br />

Magazine locations can be disabled, e.g. for oversized tools occupying adjacent<br />

magazine locations.<br />

The tool management system includes a tool monitoring function based on tool<br />

edges that monitors according to tool life or tool loading operations. Replacement<br />

tools (sister tools) are distinguished by their Duplo No. (DP). Display<br />

MD 9652 $MM_CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL can be set to deactivate the tool<br />

monitoring function.<br />

Setting 2 of display MD 9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT can be selected<br />

to set the tool management function without a Load/Unload softkey.<br />

Setting 4 of display MD 9651 $MM_CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT can be selected<br />

to set the tool management function with a Load/Unload softkey.<br />

Loading brings the tool to its magazine location.<br />

Unloading removes the tool from the magazine.<br />

Tools can be sorted in the tool and tool wear lists according to magazine location,<br />

name and type.<br />

Manual tools are tools that are stored in the tool list but not in the magazine.<br />

These tools must be attached/detached manually to/from the spindle.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Other<br />

functionalities<br />

Modifying data<br />

S Load/unload point for tools via display MD 9673<br />

$MM_CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.1 Overview of functions<br />

S Number of customer M commands via display MD 9661 $MM_CMM_ENA-<br />

BLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES<br />

S Display tools as diameter or radius via display MD 9663<br />

$MM_CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM.<br />

Note<br />

Modifications to the tool and cutting edge data via system variables in the NC<br />

program are displayed in the tool list on the <strong>ShopMill</strong> operator interface only if<br />

they refer to the tool currently loaded in the spindle.<br />

9-103


9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

9.2.1 Start-up sequence<br />

Requirements<br />

Execution<br />

9-104<br />

S PCU start-up is carried out and the connection set up to the NC.<br />

S NCK start-up is carried out with the default machine data.<br />

S Enter the NC machine data for tool management<br />

12.01<br />

S Create a new configuration file with the system variables for the tool management<br />

definition or use or adapt the examples from the NC toolbox. Then<br />

load the configuration file to the control.<br />

S Enter display machine data.<br />

Note<br />

Tool management start-up in the NC is carried out in conjunction with the<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> start-up.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

9.2.2 Entering the NC machine data for tool management<br />

Machine data for<br />

memory setting<br />

Example<br />

Machine data for the memory setting and activation of the management function<br />

must be set.<br />

Memory space must be made available in the battery-backed RAM for the tool<br />

management.<br />

The following machine data must be set:<br />

MD 18080 Activate the memory for tool management<br />

MD 18082 Number of tools to be managed by the NCK<br />

MD 18084 Number of magazines the NCK can manage (min. 3)<br />

Include the buffer and loading magazines!<br />

MD 18086 Number of magazine locations that the NCK can manage;<br />

Include 3 buffer locations (2 grippers and 1 spindle) and<br />

2 load points!<br />

MD 18100 Number of cutting edges in the NCK<br />

Note<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> manages 2 cutting edges per tool. It is therefore expedient to limit the<br />

number of edges to 2. Program the number of edges in MD 18105<br />

MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO.<br />

Allocation of machine data when a dual gripper is used so that manual tools can<br />

be used event when the magazine is fully allocated:<br />

18082=40; 40 tools (30 magazine locations + 10 additional locations for<br />

manual tools)<br />

18084=3; 1 magazine + 1 buffer magazine + 1 load magazines<br />

18086=35; 30 magazine slots + 3 buffer memory + 2 load points<br />

18100=80; 80 edges<br />

Note<br />

The machine data settings serve only to reserve memory; locations are not<br />

assigned to the magazine, etc. until the configuration file is set up and loaded<br />

(see Subsection 9.2.4 “Creating and loading the configuration file”).<br />

Modifying the “memory-influencing” machine data reformats the battery-backed<br />

RAM. The data must therefore be backed up beforehand.<br />

9-105


9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

Machine data for<br />

activating the tool<br />

management<br />

Default setting<br />

9-106<br />

12.01<br />

In addition, the following machine data must be set for activating the tool management:<br />

MD 20310 Channel-specific activation of the tool management<br />

MD 20320 Activation of the life time monitoring for the<br />

specified spindle<br />

MD 22550 New tool offset for M function<br />

MD 22560 M function for tool change<br />

MD 22562 Error reaction with programmed tool change<br />

Note<br />

Bits 0--3 of MD 20310 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK and MD 18080<br />

$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK must always be set identically.<br />

The NC machine data for tool management are contained in MD record<br />

CMM.8X0 (for default setting see overview in Section 6.1 “NC machine data for<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong>”).<br />

A detailed description of the NC machine data for tool management is given in<br />

the next Subsection 9.2.3 “Description of the NC machine data for the tool<br />

management”.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

9.2.3 Description of the NC machine data for tool management<br />

18080<br />

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK<br />

MD number<br />

Activation of memory for tool management<br />

Default setting: 0x0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFFFF<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 1/4 Unit: HEX<br />

Data type: DWORD Valid as of software version: 4.3<br />

Meaning: Activation of the tool management memory with “0” means:<br />

The set tool management data do not use memory space.<br />

Bit0=1: Memory is provided for tool management-specific data<br />

Bit1=1: Memory is provided for monitoring data<br />

Bit2=1: Memory is provided for user data (CC data)<br />

Bit3=1: Memory is provided for considering the adjacent location<br />

Bit4=1: D-RAM is provided for “Complex searching for tools in magazines”.<br />

Bit5=1: Wear monitor active (SW5 and later, <strong>840D</strong>)<br />

Bit6=1: Wear grouping available (SW5 and later, <strong>840D</strong>)<br />

The coded type of memory reservation enables economic use of the memory<br />

management for the functionality provided.<br />

Example:<br />

Default memory reservation for TM:<br />

MD = 3 (Bit0 + 1=1)<br />

MD = 1 means TM without TM monitoring function data<br />

18082<br />

MM_NUM_TOOL<br />

MD number<br />

Number of tools the NCK can manage<br />

Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 600<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: - -<br />

Data type: DWORD Valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning: The number of tools which the NCK can manage is entered here.<br />

Battery-backed memory is reserved for the number of tools.<br />

Further references: Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7), Tool Offset (W1)<br />

18084<br />

MM_NUM_MAGAZINE<br />

MD number<br />

Number of magazines the NCK can manage<br />

Default setting: 3 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 32<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: - -<br />

Data type: DWORD Valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning: Number of magazines the NCK can manage (active and background magazines). This<br />

MD can be used to reserve battery-backed memory for the magazines.<br />

Important: One load magazine and a buffer magazine is set up in the tool management for<br />

each TOA unit. These magazines must be taken into account.<br />

Value = 0: The tool management cannot be active because no data could be created.<br />

Further references: Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)<br />

9-107


9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

18086<br />

MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION<br />

MD number<br />

Number of magazine locations the NCK can manage<br />

Default setting: 10 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 600<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: - -<br />

Data type: DWORD Valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning: This MD reserves battery-backed memory for the magazine locations. The number of<br />

buffers and load points must also be set up here.<br />

Important: The locations in the buffer and a load magazine must be taken into account.<br />

Value = 0: The tool management cannot be active because no data could be created.<br />

Further references: Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)<br />

18100<br />

MD number<br />

9-108<br />

MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA<br />

Number of tool cutting edges per TOA module<br />

Default setting: 30 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 600<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: - -<br />

Data type: DWORD Valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning: Number of possible cutting edges in TOA area. TOA area is the total number of all TOA<br />

modules (for active tool management, also the magazine modules) in the NCK.<br />

Further references: Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)<br />

20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK<br />

MD number Channel-specific activation of tool management<br />

Default setting: 0x0, ... Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFFFFF<br />

Change valid after POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: HEX<br />

Data type: DWORD Valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning: MD = 0: Tool management inactive<br />

Bit0=1: Tool management active<br />

The tool management functions are activated for the current channel.<br />

Bit1=1: Tool management monitoring functions active<br />

The functions required for monitoring the tools (tool life and quantity) are<br />

activated.<br />

Bit2=1: OEM functions active<br />

The memory for user data can be used<br />

(see also MD 18090 to 18098 )<br />

Bit3=1: Consider adjacent location active<br />

Bits0 to 3 must be set identically to MD 18080<br />

MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK.<br />

Bit4=1: The PLC is able to request a tool change preparation again with modified<br />

parameters.<br />

Parts program is retained for T selection or M06 until acknowledged by the PLC<br />

program<br />

Bit5=1: The master spindle main run can be stopped within one OB1 cycle<br />

(e.g. by read-in stop) after output of a tool command.<br />

Bit5=0: The master spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.<br />

Bit6=1: The secondary spindle main run can be stopped within one OB1 cycle<br />

(e.g. by read-in stop) after output of a tool command.<br />

Bit6=0: The master spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK<br />

MD number Channel-specific activation of tool management<br />

Meaning: Bit7=1: The master spindle main run is stopped until acknowledgement via FC7, FC8<br />

with status 1... .<br />

Bit7=0: The master spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.<br />

Bit8=1: The secondary spindle main run is stopped until acknowledgement via FC7,<br />

FC8withstatus1.<br />

Bit8=0: The secondary spindle main run continues after command output to the PLC.<br />

Bit9: ReservedBit10=1: M06 is delayed until the tool change has been prepared<br />

via FC8 (status 1...) by the PLC.<br />

The change signal (e.g. M06) is not output until the tool selection<br />

(DBX [ n+0 ].2) is acknowledged. The parts program is stopped until the<br />

T selection is acknowledged.<br />

Bit10=0: The tool change ON command is not output from NCK -> PLC until the<br />

PLC preparation acknowledgement has been received.<br />

This acknowledgement is relevant for PLC command 3 (i.e. programming of<br />

M06 in a block that does not contain a T).<br />

Bit11=1: The preparatory command is also output even if it has already been output<br />

once for the same tool.<br />

This is useful for positioning the chain when ‘’Tx‘’ is called for the first time<br />

and checking whether the tool is located in the correct change position (e.g.<br />

in front of the change station).<br />

Bit11=0: The preparatory command can be output only once for each tool.<br />

Bit12=1: The preparatory command is also carried out even if the tool is already in<br />

the spindle.<br />

This means that the T selection signal (DB72.DBXn.2) is set even if it has<br />

already been set for the same tool.<br />

(Tx...Tx)<br />

Bit12=0: The preparatory command is not executed if thetool<br />

is already mounted in the spindle.<br />

Bit13=1: Only on systems with sufficient memory capacity. Recording of tool sequences<br />

in a diagnostics buffer.<br />

On Reset the commands from the diagnostics buffer are stored in the passive<br />

file system (NCATR xx.MPF under parts program).<br />

This file is required by the Hotline.<br />

Tool sequences are recorded in the diagnostics buffer only on systems with<br />

sufficient memory capacity (NCU572, NCU573).<br />

Bit14=1: An automatic tool change takes place in response to Reset and Start<br />

according to settings in the following machine data<br />

20120 MD20120 TOOL_RESET_NAME<br />

20110 MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK<br />

20124 MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER.<br />

If the tool defined in TOOL_RESET_NAME must be loaded (set via<br />

RESET_MODE_MASK), a selection and tool change command are output to<br />

the user interface (DB72) with RESET or START.<br />

If RESET_MODE_MASK is set to leave the active tool in the spindle, and if the<br />

active tool is disabled in the spindle (by user), a change command for a<br />

replacement tool is output to the user interface. If no replacement tool is<br />

available, an error message is output.<br />

Bit14=0: No automatic tool change takes place in response to RESET and START.<br />

Bit15=1: The tool is not returned if several preparatory commands are output (Tx ->Tx).<br />

This mode of function activation permits a variety of function combinations.<br />

Example for default activation of the tool management:<br />

MD 20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK = 3 (Bit0 + 1 = 1)<br />

Bit16=1: T location number is active<br />

Bit15=0: The tool is not returned.<br />

Bit16=1: T location number is active<br />

Bit17=1: Tool life decrementation can be started/stopped via the PLC in channel<br />

DB 2.1...DBx 1.3.<br />

Bit18=1: Activation of monitoring function “last tool in tool group”.<br />

Bit18=0: No monitoring for “last tool in tool group”<br />

Bit19=1: Activation for bits 5...8<br />

Bit19=0: The functions described under bits 5...8 are not available.<br />

9-109


9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

9-110<br />

12.01<br />

20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK<br />

MD number Channel-specific activation of tool management<br />

Meaning: Bit20=0: The generated commands are not output to the PLC in response to PLC signal<br />

“Program testing active”. The NCK acknowledges the commands itself.<br />

Magazine and tool data are not changed. Exception: The tool status of<br />

the tool activated in the test area can change to “active”.<br />

Bit20=1: The generated commands are output to the PLC in response to PLC signal<br />

“Program testing active”. Depending on the type of PLC acknowledgement,<br />

tool/magazine data in the NCK can be altered at the same time. If the<br />

acknowledgement parameters for the target magazine are set to the same<br />

values as the source magazine, the tool is not transported and thus no data<br />

modified in the NCK. Exception: The tool status of the tool activated in the test<br />

area can change to “active”.<br />

Bit21=0: Ignore tool status “W” when selecting a tool.<br />

Bit21=1: Tools with “W” status cannot be selected by another tool change, tool<br />

preparatory command.<br />

20320<br />

TOOL_TIME_MONITOR_MASK<br />

MD number<br />

Activation of life time monitoring for the spindle specified here<br />

Default setting: 1/2 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 4<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: - -<br />

Data type: DWORD Valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning: Value = 1: Monitoring is carried out for spindle 1.<br />

Value = 2: Monitoring is carried out for spindle 1 and spindle 2.<br />

Further references: Description of Functions: Memory Configuration (S7)<br />

22550<br />

TOOL_CHANGE_MODE<br />

MD number<br />

New tool offset for M function<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Changes valid from: POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: - -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of software version: 1.1<br />

Meaning: A tool is selected in the program with the T function. Whether the new tool is changed<br />

immediately with the T function depends on the setting in this MD:<br />

MD = 0<br />

The new tool is changed immediately with the T function. This setting is used mainly for<br />

turning machines with tool revolver.<br />

MD = 1<br />

The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function. This setting is mainly used on<br />

milling machines with tool magazine to move the new tool to the tool change position in<br />

parallel with machining (i.e. machining operation is not interrupted).<br />

The old tool is removed from the spindle and the new tool loaded to it by means of the M<br />

function entered in the MD. According to DIN 66025, this tool change must be<br />

programmed with the M function M06.<br />

Corresponding to ... MD 22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE<br />

Further references: Description of Functions: Coordinate Systems (K2)<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE<br />

MD number M function for tool change<br />

Default setting: 6 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 9999 9999<br />

Change takes effect after POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: DWORD Valid as of software version: 1.1<br />

Meaning: If the T function is used only to prepare a new tool for tool change (for milling machines with<br />

tool magazine, this setting is mainly used to bring the new tool to the tool change position in<br />

parallel with the machining time), the tool change must be initiated with a further M function.<br />

The M function entered in the MD initiates the tool change (remove old tool from the spindle<br />

and load the new tool in the spindle). According to DIN 66025, this tool change must be<br />

programmed with the M function M06.<br />

Corresponding to... MD 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE<br />

Further references: Description of Functions: Tool Offset (W1)<br />

22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE<br />

MD number Error reaction with programmed tool change<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 3<br />

Change takes effect after POWER ON Protection level: 2/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: DWORD Valid as of software version: 5.1<br />

Meaning: If MD 22550 is set to 0, the default setting of MD 22562 should not be altered.<br />

Bit0=0: Standard response:<br />

The program stops in the NC block containing the error.<br />

Bit0=1: If the error occurs in the block containing the tool change preparation command,<br />

the alarm activated by the preparation command (T) is ignored until the program<br />

run reaches the point at which the associated tool change command (M06) is<br />

interpreted.<br />

The alarm activated by the preparation command is not output until this moment.<br />

The user cannot therefore make any corrections until this program block is<br />

reached.<br />

Bit1=0: With active tool management only:<br />

In preparing tool changes, the NCK detects only tools with data assigned to a<br />

magazine.<br />

Bit1=1: With active tool management only:<br />

The NCK also loads a tool whose data are stored in the NCK, but to which no<br />

magazine is assigned.<br />

In this case, the NCK attempts to assign the tool data to the programmed spindle<br />

location automatically.<br />

If several usable tools are available, another search is started for an active tool.<br />

If no active tool can be found, the tool with the lowest duplo number is selected.<br />

Bit2=0 Active D no. > 0 and active T no. = 0 equals an offset of zero<br />

Active DL no. > 0 and active D no. = 0 equals a total offset of zero<br />

Bit2=1 Active D no. > 0 and active T no. = 0 generates an alarm message<br />

Active DL no. > 0 and active D no. = 0 generates an alarm message<br />

Corresponding to... MD 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE<br />

Further references: Description of Functions: Tool Offset (W1)<br />

9-111


9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

9.2.4 Creating and loading the configuration file<br />

Examples<br />

9-112<br />

12.01<br />

To start up the tool management function, you must create a configuration file<br />

and load it to the NC.<br />

Create a new configuration file with the system variables for the tool management<br />

definition or adapt the examples from the toolbox.<br />

Note<br />

With the PCU 50, you can also set up the configuration file on the CNC ISO<br />

operator interface.<br />

References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management<br />

The configuration file must include the following settings:<br />

S Define the type of search strategy<br />

S Define the real magazine<br />

S Define buffer magazine<br />

S Define load magazine<br />

S Define locations for the real magazine<br />

S Define locations for the buffer magazine<br />

S Define the spindle assignment<br />

S Define the locations for the load magazine<br />

S Define the distances for the real magazine<br />

Load the configuration file to the NC.<br />

The following examples can be found in tools\sd in the toolbox:<br />

S TM_WO_GR.8X0 (configuration without dual gripper) with the following contents:<br />

-- 1 real magazine with 30 locations<br />

-- 1 spindle<br />

-- 2 load points<br />

S TM_W_GR.8X0 (configuration with dual gripper) with the following contents:<br />

-- 1 real magazine with 30 locations<br />

-- 1 spindle<br />

-- 2 grippers<br />

-- 2 load points<br />

If necessary, adapt the configuration files in the lines typed in bold print.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Display of the<br />

configuration file<br />

TM_W_GR.8X0<br />

%_N_TO_TMA_INI<br />

CHANDATA (1)<br />

;-------------------<br />

;Magazine configuration<br />

;-------------------<br />

;Delete old data<br />

;----------------<br />

$TC_MAP1 [0]=0<br />

$TC_DP1 [0,0]=0<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

;Type of search strategy<br />

;-----------------<br />

$TC_MAMP2=257 ; Search for active tools from<br />

,1st location onwards<br />

;Magazine definition<br />

;--------------<br />

;Real magazine<br />

$TC_MAP1 [1]=1 ; magazine kind (1: chain)<br />

$TC_MAP3 [1]=17 ; magazine status (17:<br />

active magazine<br />

; activate for loading)<br />

$TC_MAP6 [1]=1 ; number of magazine tiers<br />

$TC_MAP7 [1]=30 ; number of magazine locations<br />

;Buffer magazine<br />

$TC_MAP1 [9998]=7 ; magazine kind (7: buffer)<br />

$TC_MAP3 [9998]=17<br />

$TC_MAP6 [9998]=1<br />

$TC_MAP7 [9998]=3 ; number of buffer locations<br />

; (3: Spindle with dual gripper)<br />

;Load magazine<br />

$TC_MAP1 [9999]=9 ; magazine kind (9: load magazine)<br />

$TC_MAP3 [9999]=17<br />

$TC_MAP6 [9999]=1<br />

$TC_MAP7 [9999]=2 ; number of load points<br />

;Locations in real magazine<br />

;------------------------------<br />

;Location No. 1<br />

$TC_MPP1 [1,1]=1 ; location kind<br />

(1: magazine location)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [1,1]=1 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [1,1]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)<br />

$TC_MPP4 [1,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [1,1]=1<br />

No. 1)<br />

;Location No. 2<br />

; location kind index (1: location<br />

$TC_MPP1 [1,2]=1 ; location kind<br />

(1: magazine location)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [1,2]=1 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [1,2]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)<br />

$TC_MPP4 [1,2]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [1,2]=2 ; location type index<br />

(2: location No. 2)<br />

9-113


9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

9-114<br />

12.01<br />

;Location No. 3<br />

$TC_MPP1 [1,3]=1 ; location kind<br />

(1: magazine location)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [1,3]=1 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [1,3]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)<br />

$TC_MPP4 [1,3]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [1,3]=3 ; location kind index (3: location<br />

No. 3)<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

;Location No. 29<br />

$TC_MPP1 [1,29]=1 ; location kind<br />

(1: magazine location)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [1,29]=1 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [1,29]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)<br />

$TC_MPP4 [1,29]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [1,29]=29 ; location kind index (29: location<br />

No. 29)<br />

;Location no. 30<br />

$TC_MPP1 [1,30]=1 ; location kind<br />

(1: magazine location)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [1,30]=1 ;location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [1,30]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: on)<br />

$TC_MPP4 [1,30]=2 ; location status (2: free location)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [1,30]=30 ; location kind index<br />

(30: location No. 30)<br />

;Locations in buffer magazine<br />

;---------------------------------<br />

;spindle<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9998,1]=2 ; location kind (2: spindle)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9998,1]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9998,1]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9998,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9998,1]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: location No. 1)<br />

;Gripper 1<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9998,2]=3 ; location kind (3: gripper)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9998,2]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9998,2]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9998,2]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9998,2]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: location No. 1)<br />

;Gripper 2<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9998,3]=3 ; location kind (3: gripper)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9998,3]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9998,3]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9998,3]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9998,3]=2 ; location type index<br />

(2: location No. 2)<br />

;Assignment of buffers to spindle<br />

;-------------------------------------<br />

$TC_MLSR [2,1]=0 ; 1st gripper<br />

$TC_MLSR [3,1]=0 ; 2nd gripper<br />

;Locations on load magazine<br />

;-----------------------<br />

;1st load magazine<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9999,1]=7 ; location kind (7: load point)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9999,1]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9999,1]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9999,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9999,1]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: location No. 1)<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Brief description<br />

of variables<br />

Magazine data<br />

$TC_MAP1<br />

Magazine data<br />

$TC_MAP3<br />

Magazine data<br />

$TC_MAP6<br />

Magazine data<br />

$TC_MAP7<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

;2nd loading station<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9999,2]=7 ; location kind (7: load point)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9999,2]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9999,2]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9999,2]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9999,2]=2 ; location type index<br />

(2: location No. 2)<br />

;Distances between load points/buffer and real; magazine<br />

;-----------------------------------------------------<br />

$TC_MDP2 [1,1]=0 ; spindle<br />

$TC_MDP2 [1,2]=0 ; gripper 1<br />

$TC_MDP2 [1,3]=0 ; gripper 2<br />

$TC_MDP1 [1,1]=0 ; 1st load point<br />

$TC_MDP1 [1,2]=0 ; 2nd load point<br />

M17<br />

The description of variables given below refers to the configuration file in the<br />

toolbox. You can find other descriptions of variables in:<br />

References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management:<br />

$TC_MAP1[MagazineNo]= Magazine type<br />

S 1: chain<br />

S 3: revolver<br />

S 5: flat magazine<br />

S 7: internal magazine tool buffer<br />

S 9: internal magazine loading station<br />

$TC_MAP3[MagazineNo]= magazine status<br />

Bit mask (specification applies for bit=1):<br />

S Bit0: active magazine<br />

S Bit1: blocked<br />

S Bit2: magazine is at load position<br />

S Bit3: tool motion is active<br />

S Bit4: enabled for loading<br />

Default = 17 means: active magazine, enabled for loading<br />

Number of magazines (in this case: 1)<br />

Number of locations<br />

e.g. number of buffer locations: 3 = 1 spindle and 2 grippers<br />

9-115


9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

Search strategy<br />

$TC_MAMP2<br />

Location kind<br />

$TC_MPP1<br />

Location type<br />

$TC_MPP2<br />

9-116<br />

$TC_MAMP2= Type of search strategy<br />

This mask is divided into a right and left byte,<br />

S the right byte describes the tool search (bits0 and 1)<br />

S the left byte describes the empty location search for the spindle tool.<br />

A value must be specified for both strategies.<br />

Bit mask (specification applies for bit=1):<br />

S Bit0: search for active tool with designation (1)<br />

S Bit1: search for next tool with designation (2)<br />

S Bit8: search from 1st location onwards (256)<br />

S Bit9: search from current location onwards (512)<br />

S Bit10: search from last location backwards (1024)<br />

S Bit11: search from current location backwards (2048)<br />

S Bit12: search from current location symmetrically (4096)<br />

Example: $TC_MAMP2=4097 (bit12 and bit0=1)<br />

Bit12: Search for empty location: search from current location symmetrically,<br />

Bit0: Tool search: search for active tool<br />

$TC_MPP1[MagazineNo, LocNo]= location kind:<br />

S 1 = magazine location<br />

S 2 = spindle<br />

S 3 = gripper<br />

S 4 = loader<br />

S 5 = transfer location<br />

S 6 = loading station<br />

S 7 = load point<br />

Default: value of corresponding location type<br />

$TC_MPP2[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Location type:<br />

12.01<br />

Any values can be entered here. The values must match the tools to be loaded<br />

at the location.<br />

Buffer and load point have the value 0!<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Consider adjacent<br />

location $TC_MPP3<br />

Location status<br />

$TC_MPP4<br />

Location kind index<br />

$TC_MPP5<br />

Distances to magazine<br />

Spindle assignment<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

$TC_MPP3[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Consider adjacent location on = 1<br />

S Value = 1: the adjacent location is considered for the location<br />

S Value = 0: the adjacent location is not considered for the location<br />

S Value = 0: is to be entered for buffer and load locations!<br />

$TC_MPP4[MagazineNo, LocNo]= Location status (bit mask)<br />

S Bit0: blocked<br />

S Bit1: free/allocated<br />

Default: 2 = location free<br />

$TC_MPP5[Magazine No., Location No.]= Location kind index<br />

For $TC_MPP1[Magazine No., Location No.]=1 (location kind is the magazine<br />

location), the location number is entered here. For other location kinds, the kind<br />

index is incremented:<br />

Example with 2 grippers with location kind 3<br />

S the first gripper has location index 1<br />

S the second gripper has location index 2<br />

Distances to magazine<br />

$TC_MDP2[MagazineNo, BUFFno.]= Distances between buffer and magazine<br />

A value must be entered for each buffer, at least a zero. The value is not interpreted<br />

here but is used only for assignment.<br />

$TC_MDP1[MagazineNo, LoadpointNo]= Distances between load points and<br />

magazine<br />

One value must be entered for each load location here. It is interpreted when<br />

calculating the location before the load point. Only for “Load point for spindle”<br />

(location 1) is the value not interpreted but used “only” for magazine assignment.<br />

$TC_MLSR[LocationNo of BUFF, LocationNo of spindle]= Assignment between<br />

buffer and spindle.<br />

This enables determination of which buffer, e.g. gripper, may carry out tool<br />

change to the spindle.<br />

9-117


9ToolManagement 9.2 Start-up of the tool management in the NC<br />

9.2.5 Entering display machine data for tool management<br />

Display machine<br />

data<br />

Default setting/<br />

description<br />

9-118<br />

Display machine data enable you to activate certain functions and settings at<br />

the user interface.<br />

MD 9651 Tool management concept<br />

MD 9652 Tool monitoring<br />

MD 9661 Number of customer M commands<br />

MD 9663 Display radius/diameter for tool<br />

MD 9667 Tool preselection active<br />

MD 9672 Fixed location<br />

MD 9673 Number of loading station<br />

MD 9674 Display magazine list<br />

The default setting and machine data description can be found in Section 6.2<br />

“Display machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong>”.<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

9.3.1 Overview<br />

General<br />

NCK<br />

Tool<br />

management<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

PLC DB4<br />

Basic<br />

program<br />

block<br />

FC6<br />

Basic<br />

program<br />

block<br />

FC8<br />

Basic<br />

program<br />

block<br />

Fig. 9-1 Overview of tool management<br />

DB71<br />

DB72<br />

User<br />

interface<br />

DB74<br />

Internal<br />

interface<br />

Acknowledgement/Status<br />

User<br />

program<br />

OB100<br />

.<br />

.<br />

FC100<br />

User<br />

program<br />

OB1<br />

.<br />

.<br />

FB110,<br />

DB110<br />

FC6 supplies data blocks DB71/72 with the information for the new and old<br />

tools. FC6 is called by the basic program and need not be called again in the<br />

user program.<br />

So that the tool management always knows where the current tool is located,<br />

each location change must be notified to the tool management via FC8 (transfer<br />

block). FC8 (transfer block) is called by the user program (FB110).<br />

The data blocks DB71/72 and 74 are set up automatically. The lengths of the<br />

data blocks are determined by the parameters for the tool management in DB4.<br />

These are written by the user program (FC100).<br />

9-119


9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

9.3.2 Start-up sequence<br />

Requirements<br />

Execution<br />

9-120<br />

S PCU start-up is carried out and the connection set up to the NC.<br />

S NCK start-up is carried out with the NC machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong>.<br />

S The standard basic program is loaded.<br />

S Adapt one of the following source files and compile it:<br />

-- TM_WO_GR.AWL (data transfer without dual gripper)<br />

-- TM_W_GR.AWL (data transfer with dual gripper)<br />

12.01<br />

Source files TM_WO_GR.AWL and TM_W_GR.AWL contain the following<br />

blocks<br />

-- FC100 (block for tool management configuration)<br />

-- FB110, DB110 (blocks for data transfer in tool management)<br />

The blocks for transferring tool management data (FB110, DB110) must be<br />

adapted to suit the individual machine.<br />

S Call the blocks in OB1 and OB100:<br />

-- Call FC100 in OB100 (before FB1)<br />

-- CallFB110inOB1(afterFC30)<br />

The specified call sequence for these blocks is mandatory.<br />

S Load the blocks to the PLC<br />

Note<br />

Tool management start-up in the PLC is carried out in conjunction with <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

start-up.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

9.3.3 Description of blocks<br />

General<br />

FC100<br />

FB110<br />

Data transfer<br />

without dual gripper<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

Two STL sources are available for tool management in the <strong>ShopMill</strong> library:<br />

S TM_WO_GR.AWL (data transfer without dual gripper) with contents<br />

-- FC100 (tool management configuration)<br />

-- FB110 (data transfer for tool management in standard mode)<br />

S TM_W_GR.AWL (data transfer with dual gripper) with contents<br />

-- FC100 (tool management configuration)<br />

-- FB110 (data transfer for tool management in standard mode)<br />

The block for configuration of the tool management (FC 100) is identical in both<br />

STL sources. The block for data transfer for tool management in standard mode<br />

(FB110) is different in both STL sources.<br />

Block FC100 transfers the configuration data of the tool management to DB4<br />

and must be called in OB100.<br />

The configuration data are preset for 2 load points (DB71) and one spindle<br />

(DB72).<br />

The “Real MagLoc” parameter of FC100 (number of locations of the real magazine)<br />

must be supplied when FC100 is called so that FC22 (direction selection)<br />

canbeused.<br />

Block FB110 controls the data transfer for tool management in standard mode.<br />

This block must be called in OB1. Data module DB110 (instance DB) must be<br />

loaded.<br />

The block includes the following functions:<br />

S Acknowledge load/unload/relocate for 1st load point<br />

S Acknowledge load/unload for 1st load point<br />

S Acknowledge prepare/change for 1st spindle<br />

S Abort, i.e. negative acknowledgment for the above-mentioned functions<br />

The acknowledgment for this function can be enabled by the PLC via the input<br />

parameter of FB110, e.g. load/unload via customer key (see table below for<br />

input parameters).<br />

FB110 from the AWL source TM_WO_GR.AWL may be used for data transfer<br />

without dual gripper.<br />

Tool change from the magazine to the spindle is carried out in one step here.<br />

The tool magazine is changed directly into the spindle.<br />

9-121


9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

Data transfer with<br />

dual gripper<br />

9-122<br />

Table 9-1 Input parameters of FB110 from TM_WO_GR.AWL<br />

12.01<br />

Signal Type Default Remarks<br />

Prepare_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable preparation for spindle 1<br />

Change_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable change for spindle 1<br />

Load_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable loading for load point 1<br />

Unload_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable unloading for load point 1<br />

Relocate_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable relocation for load point 1<br />

Load_IF2 BOOL TRUE Enable loading for load point 2<br />

Unload_IF2 BOOL TRUE Enable unloading for load point 2<br />

Reset_IF BOOL FALSE Abort for one of the above-mentioned functions<br />

Note<br />

MD 9673 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION defines the interface via which the<br />

magazine will be loaded or unloaded.<br />

FB110 from the AWL source TM_W_GR.AWL may be used for data transfer<br />

with dual gripper.<br />

The tool change is carried out in two steps by the magazine in the spindle. The<br />

tool is first moved from the magazine to the gripper and then onto the spindle.<br />

Table 9-2 Input parameters of FB110 from TM_W_GR.AWL<br />

Signal Type Default Remarks<br />

Prepare_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable preparation for spindle 1<br />

Change1_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable change step 1 (via gripper 1/2) for<br />

spindle 1<br />

Change2_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable change step 2 (via gripper 1/2) for<br />

spindle 1<br />

Load_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable loading for load point 1<br />

Unload_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable unloading for load point 1<br />

Relocate_IF1 BOOL TRUE Enable relocation for load point 1<br />

Load_IF2 BOOL TRUE Enable loading for load point 2<br />

Unload_IF2 BOOL TRUE Enable unloading for load point 2<br />

Reset_IF BOOL FALSE Abort for one of the above-mentioned functions<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Note<br />

9.3.4 Signal description<br />

Overview of<br />

data blocks<br />

Description of<br />

DB71<br />

DB71<br />

Data block<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

MD 9673 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION defines which interface will be<br />

loaded/unloaded.<br />

The following data blocks are used for tool management purposes:<br />

DB71 for load/unload points<br />

DB72 for spindle as change position<br />

DB74 internal data block for tool management<br />

If the data of magazines, buffer memories or loading positions are changed in<br />

the start-up branch, then data blocks DB71 to DB74 must be deleted and the<br />

PLC restarted.<br />

Signals of load/unload points<br />

NCK ->PLC interface<br />

Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0<br />

Interfaces<br />

DBB 0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1<br />

DBB 1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9<br />

DBB 2, 3<br />

DBB n + 0 NC program<br />

positions<br />

magazine<br />

Position at<br />

load point<br />

DBB n + 1 Unassigned<br />

DBB n + 2 Assigned channel (8bit-Int)<br />

DBB n + 3 Tool management number (8bit-Int)<br />

DBD n + 4 $P_VDITCP[0]<br />

User parameter 0 (DWord)<br />

DBD n + 8 $P_VDITCP[1]<br />

User parameter 1 (DWord)<br />

DBD n + 12 $P_VDITCP[2]<br />

User parameter 2 (DWord)<br />

DBW n + 16 Identifier for load/unload point (Int), (fixed value 9999)<br />

DBW n + 18 Location no. of load/unload point (Int)<br />

DBW n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)<br />

DBW n + 22 Location no. (source) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)<br />

DBW n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)<br />

DBW n + 26 Location no. (target) for loading/relocation/positioning (Int)<br />

DBW n + 28 Spare<br />

Relocate Unload Load<br />

9-123


9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

9-124<br />

Initial addresses of load/unload points:<br />

Load/unload point 1: n = 4<br />

2: n = 34<br />

3: n = 64<br />

4: n = 94<br />

Example calculation of address DBW n+24 (magazine no. target)<br />

n = (m--1) * len + 4 m = location no. of loading location/point<br />

len = 30 (length of a load point)<br />

m=2; len=30 n=(2--1)*30+4==>n=34<br />

DBW (34 + 24) = DBW 58<br />

Address for magazine no. target of 2nd load point is DBW 58.<br />

12.01<br />

Load point 1 is intended for loading/unloading in all spindles. This must be<br />

taken into account in the load interface assignment (applies to PCU 20; automatically<br />

taken into account in PCU 50). Load point 1 is also used for relocation/positioning<br />

of tools in any location (e.g. buffer location).<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Description of<br />

DB72<br />

DB72<br />

Data block<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

Spindle as change point<br />

NCK-->PLC interface<br />

Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0<br />

DBB 0 INT 8 INT 7 INT 6 INT 5 INT 4 INT 3 INT 2 INT 1<br />

DBB 1 INT 16 INT 15 INT 14 INT 13 INT 12 INT 11 INT 10 INT 9<br />

DBB 2, 3<br />

DBB n + 0 Spare Detach<br />

manual tool<br />

Attach<br />

manual<br />

tool<br />

OldTool in<br />

BL No.<br />

(n+42)<br />

DBB n + 1 Unassigned<br />

TO Prepare<br />

change<br />

DBB n + 2 Assigned channel (8bit-Int)<br />

DBB n + 3 Tool management number (8bit-Int)<br />

DBD n + 4 $P_VDITCP[0]<br />

User parameter 0 (DWord)<br />

DBD n + 8 $P_VDITCP[1]<br />

User parameter 1 (DWord)<br />

DBD n + 12 $P_VDITCP[2]<br />

User parameter 2 (DWord)<br />

DBW n + 16 Buffer identifier (Int), fixed value 9998)<br />

equals “Target position for new tool”<br />

DBW n + 18 Relative location (target) in buffer magazine (Int)<br />

DBW n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for new tool (Int)<br />

DBW n + 22 Location no. (source) for new tool (Int)<br />

DBW n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for old tool (Int)<br />

DBW n + 26 Location no. (target) for old tool (Int)<br />

DBW n + 28 New tool: Location type (Int)<br />

DBW n + 30 New tool: Size left (Int)<br />

DBW n + 32 New tool: Size right (Int)<br />

DBW n + 34 New tool: Size top (Int)<br />

DBW n + 36 New tool: Size bottom (Int)<br />

DBW n + 38 Tool status for new tool<br />

Tool has<br />

been used<br />

Tool with<br />

fixed loc.<br />

code<br />

Prewarn<br />

lim.<br />

reached<br />

Measure<br />

tool<br />

Change tool<br />

(initiated by:<br />

M06)<br />

Enable<br />

tool<br />

DBW n + 40 New tool: Internal T no. of NCK (Int)<br />

DBW n + 42 If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then the buffer location of the old tool must be entered here<br />

DBW n + 44 Spare<br />

DBW n + 46 Spare<br />

Initial addresses of spindles: Spindle 1: n = 4<br />

Spindle 2: n = 52<br />

Spindle 3: n = 100<br />

n = (m--1)* len + 4 m = location no. of change position<br />

len= 48<br />

Obligatory<br />

change<br />

Active<br />

tool<br />

9-125


9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

9-126<br />

Note<br />

DBB (n+1) to DBW (n+46) are updated with a T selection only.<br />

A description of data blocks DB71 and DB74 can be found in<br />

References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management:<br />

12.01<br />

DB72<br />

DBX 0.0 - 0.15 Active status of interface 1 -16<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Signal state 1 Associated interface has a valid block, a tool change request has been initiated.<br />

Signal state 0 Process for this interface is complete.<br />

DB72<br />

DBB(n+0) Tool change information<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 5<br />

Meaning Bit0: Obligatory change<br />

Bit1: Change tool (initiated by M06)<br />

Bit2: Prepare change<br />

Bit3: “T 0” is programmed<br />

Bit4: Old tool in buffer number (n+42)<br />

Bit5: Attach manual tool<br />

Bit6: Detach manual tool<br />

Bit7: Spare<br />

Note<br />

The bits in DBB (n+0) ( prepare change, change tool,...) are not reset by the<br />

system. They are up-to-date only if the appropriate interface bit in DBB0 is set<br />

to ‘’1’’. However, the bits can be reset by the user if necessary.<br />

DB72<br />

DBB(n+2) Assigned channel<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Channel no. to which active interface applies<br />

DB72<br />

DBB(n+3) Tool management no.<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Associated tool management number<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

DB72<br />

DBD(n+4) User parameter 0 (DInt)<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning $P_VDITCP[0]=(value); can be programmed to transfer a value to the PLC via the parts program.<br />

DB72<br />

DBD(n+8) User parameter 1 (DInt)<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning $P_VDITCP[1]=(value); can be programmed to transfer a value to the PLC via the parts program.<br />

DB72<br />

DBD(n+12) User parameter 2 (DInt)<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning $P_VDITCP[2]=(value); can be programmed to transfer a value to the PLC via the parts program.<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+16) Buffer magazine no. (fixed value 9998) target position for new tool<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Magazine no. 9998 for all buffer magazines, target magazine for new tool<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+18) Location in buffer magazine (spindle)<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Location of buffer magazine to which the new tool must be loaded. This is normally the spindle.<br />

The location number defined for this particular buffer during start-up is output.<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+20) Magazine no. (source) for new tool<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Source magazine no. of new tool<br />

Corresponding to... DBW(n+22)<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+22) Location no. (source) for new tool<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of SW: 2<br />

Meaning Source location no. of new tool<br />

Corresponding to... DBW(n+20)<br />

9-127


9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

9-128<br />

12.01<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+24) Magazine no. (target) for old tool<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Number of magazine to which old tool must be loaded.<br />

Corresponding to... DBW(n+26)<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+26) Location no. (target) for old tool<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Number of location to which old tool must be loaded.<br />

Corresponding to... DBW(n+26)<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+28) New tool: Location type<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning The location type of the new tool is entered here.<br />

Corresponding to... Tool size: Left, right, top, bottom<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+30) New tool: Size left<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Specification of tool size on left in half-locations for new tool.<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+32) New tool: Size right<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Specification of tool size on right in half-locations for new tool.<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+34) New tool: Size top<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Specification of tool size at top in half-locations for new tool.<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+36) New tool: Size bottom<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Specification of tool size at bottom in half-locations for new tool.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.3 Tool management start-up in the PLC<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+38) Tool status for new tool<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Bit0: Active tool<br />

Bit1: Tool enabled<br />

Bit2: Tool disabled<br />

Bit3: Measure tool<br />

Bit4: Prewarning limit reached<br />

Bit6: Tool is fixed-location-coded<br />

Bit7: Tool has been used<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+40) New tool: Internal T no. of NCK<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Conditional Signal(s) valid as of software version: 2<br />

Meaning Display of internal T no. of NCK for the new tool.<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+42) Reserved<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

Meaning<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+44) Reserved<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

Meaning<br />

DB72<br />

DBW(n+46) Reserved<br />

Data block Signal(s)<br />

Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal(s) valid as of software version:<br />

Meaning<br />

9-129


9ToolManagement 9.4 Examples<br />

9.4 Examples<br />

9-130<br />

The examples show how to<br />

12.01<br />

S use the configuration files (TM_WO_GR.8X0 and TM_W_GR.8X0) and where<br />

they have to be adapted if appropriate.<br />

S use the STL sources (TM_WO_GR.AWL and TM_W_GR.AWL) and where<br />

the blocks generated must be called.<br />

9.4.1 Example 1: Machine with disk-type magazine<br />

Precondition<br />

Set NC machine<br />

data<br />

Adapting the<br />

configuration file<br />

Disk-type magazine with 30 locations: Tool change is carried out directly in the<br />

spindle.<br />

Table 9-3 NC machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

NC MD<br />

number<br />

Name Value<br />

18086 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION 35<br />

Match the configuration file TM_WO_GR.8X0 (configuration without dual<br />

gripper) at the points marked in bold type and load into the NC.<br />

%_N_TO_TMA_INI<br />

CHANDATA (1)<br />

;-------------------<br />

;Magazine configuration<br />

;-------------------<br />

;Delete old data<br />

;----------------<br />

$TC_MAP1 [0]=0<br />

$TC_DP1 [0,0]=0<br />

;Type of search strategy<br />

;-----------------<br />

$TC_MAMP2=257 ; Search for active tools<br />

; from 1st location onwards<br />

;Magazine definition<br />

;--------------<br />

;Real magazine<br />

$TC_MAP1 [1]=1 ; magazine kind (1: chain)<br />

$TC_MAP3 [1]=17 ; magazine status (17: active<br />

; magazine, enable for<br />

; loading)<br />

$TC_MAP6 [1]=1 ; number of magazine tiers<br />

$TC_MAP7 [1]=30 ; number of magazine locations<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.4 Examples<br />

;Buffer magazine<br />

$TC_MAP1 [9998]=7 ; magazine kind (7: buffer)<br />

$TC_MAP3 [9998]=17<br />

$TC_MAP6 [9998]=1<br />

$TC_MAP7 [9998]=1 ; number of buffer locations<br />

; (1: spindle)<br />

;Load magazine<br />

$TC_MAP1 [9999]=9 ; magazine kind (9: load magazine)<br />

$TC_MAP3 [9999]=17<br />

$TC_MAP6 [9999]=1<br />

$TC_MAP7 [9999]=2 ; number of load points<br />

;Locations in real magazine<br />

;------------------------------<br />

;Location No. 1<br />

$TC_MPP1 [1,1]=1 ; location kind (1: magazine location)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [1,1]=1 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [1,1]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: active)<br />

$TC_MPP4 [1,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [1,1]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: Location no. 1)<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

;Location No.30<br />

$TC_MPP1 [1,30]=1 ; location kind<br />

(1: magazine location)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [1,30]=1 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [1,30]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: active)<br />

$TC_MPP4 [1,30]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [1,30]=30 ; location kind index<br />

(16: Location no. 16)<br />

;Locations in buffer magazine<br />

;---------------------------------<br />

;spindle<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9998,1]=2 ; location kind (2: spindle)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9998,1]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9998,1]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9998,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9998,1]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: location No. 1)<br />

;Locations on load magazine<br />

;-----------------------<br />

;1st load magazine<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9999,1]=7 ; location kind (7: load point)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9999,1]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9999,1]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9999,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9999,1]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: location No. 1)<br />

;2nd loading station<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9999,2]=7 ; location kind (7: load point)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9999,2]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9999,2]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9999,2]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9999,2]=2 ; location type index<br />

(2: location No. 2)<br />

9-131


9ToolManagement 9.4 Examples<br />

Create tool management<br />

blocks<br />

9-132<br />

;Distances between load points/buffer and real<br />

;magazine<br />

;-----------------------------------------------------<br />

$TC_MDP2 [1,1]=0 ; spindle<br />

$TC_MDP1 [1,1]=0 ; 1st load point<br />

$TC_MDP1 [1,2]=0 ; 2nd load point<br />

M17<br />

12.01<br />

Compile STL source TM_WO_GR.AWL (data transfer without dual gripper).<br />

Then load the generated blocks FC100, FB110, DB110 in the PLC and call in<br />

OB1 and OB100 (see Section 4.2 “Example for OB1 and OB100”).<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

9.4.2 Example 2: Machine with chain magazine<br />

Precondition<br />

Set NC machine<br />

data<br />

Adapt the configuration<br />

file<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.4 Examples<br />

Chain magazine with 30 locations: The tool change is carried out in the spindle<br />

with gripper 1/2.<br />

Table 9-4 NC machine data for <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

NC MD<br />

number<br />

Name Value<br />

18086 $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION 35<br />

Adapt configuration file TM_W_GR.8X0 (configuration with dual gripper) at the<br />

points marked in bold type and load into the NC.<br />

%_N_TO_TMA_INI<br />

CHANDATA (1)<br />

;-------------------<br />

;Magazine configuration<br />

;-------------------<br />

;Delete old data<br />

;----------------<br />

$TC_MAP1 [0]=0<br />

$TC_DP1 [0,0]=0<br />

;Type of search strategy<br />

;-----------------<br />

$TC_MAMP2=257 ; Search for active tools from<br />

; 1st location onwards<br />

;Magazine definition<br />

;--------------<br />

;Real magazine<br />

$TC_MAP1 [1]=1 ; magazine kind (1: chain)<br />

$TC_MAP3 [1]=17 ; magazine status (17: active<br />

; magazine, enable for loading)<br />

$TC_MAP6 [1]=1 ; number of magazine tiers<br />

$TC_MAP7 [1]=30 ; number of magazine locations<br />

;Buffer magazine<br />

$TC_MAP1 [9998]=7 ; magazine kind (7: buffer)<br />

$TC_MAP3 [9998]=17<br />

$TC_MAP6 [9998]=1<br />

$TC_MAP7 [9998]=3 ; number of buffer locations<br />

; (3: Spindle with dual gripper)<br />

;Load magazine<br />

$TC_MAP1 [9999]=9 ; magazine kind (9: load magazine)<br />

$TC_MAP3 [9999]=17<br />

$TC_MAP6 [9999]=1<br />

$TC_MAP7 [9999]=2 ; number of load points<br />

9-133


9ToolManagement 9.4 Examples<br />

9-134<br />

12.01<br />

;Locations in real magazine<br />

;------------------------------<br />

;Location No. 1<br />

$TC_MPP1 [1,1]=1 ; location kind (1: magazine location)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [1,1]=1 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [1,1]=1 ; consider adjacent location (1: active)<br />

$TC_MPP4 [1,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [1,1]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: location no. 1)<br />

.<br />

.<br />

.<br />

;Location No.30<br />

$TC_MPP1 [1,30]=1 ; location kind<br />

(1: magazine location)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [1,30]=1 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [1,30]=1 ; consider adjacent location<br />

(1: active)<br />

$TC_MPP4 [1,30]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [1,30]=30 ; location kind index<br />

(50: Location No. 50)<br />

;Locations in buffer magazine<br />

;---------------------------------<br />

;spindle<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9998,1]=2 ; location kind (2: spindle)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9998,1]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9998,1]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9998,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9998,1]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: location No. 1)<br />

;Gripper 1<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9998,2]=3 ; location kind (3: gripper)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9998,2]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9998,2]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9998,2]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9998,2]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: location No. 1)<br />

;Gripper 2<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9998,3]=3 ; location kind (3: gripper)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9998,3]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9998,3]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9998,3]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9998,3]=2 ; location type index<br />

(2: location No. 2)<br />

;Assignment of buffers to spindle<br />

;-------------------------------------<br />

$TC_MLSR [2,1]=0 ; 1st gripper<br />

$TC_MLSR [3,1]=0 ; 2nd gripper<br />

;Locations on load magazine<br />

;-----------------------<br />

;1st load magazine<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9999,1]=7 ; location kind (7: load point)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9999,1]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9999,1]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9999,1]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9999,1]=1 ; location kind index<br />

(1: location No. 1)<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Create tool management<br />

blocks<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.4 Examples<br />

;2nd loading station<br />

$TC_MPP1 [9999,2]=7 ; location kind (7: load point)<br />

$TC_MPP2 [9999,2]=0 ; location type<br />

$TC_MPP3 [9999,2]=0 ; consider adjacent location<br />

$TC_MPP4 [9999,2]=2 ; location status (2: location free)<br />

$TC_MPP5 [9999,2]=2 ; location type index<br />

(2: location No. 2)<br />

;Distances between load points/buffer and real<br />

;magazine<br />

;-----------------------------------------------------<br />

$TC_MDP2 [1,1]=0 ; spindle<br />

$TC_MDP2 [1,2]=0 ; gripper 1<br />

$TC_MDP2 [1,3]=0 ; gripper 2<br />

$TC_MDP1 [1,1]=0 ; 1st load point<br />

$TC_MDP1 [1,2]=0 ; 2nd load point<br />

M17<br />

Compile the STL source TM_W_GR.AWL (data transfer with dual gripper). Then<br />

load the generated blocks FC100, FB110, DB110 in the PLC and call in OB1<br />

and OB100 (see Section 4.2 “Example for OB1 and OB100”).<br />

9-135


9ToolManagement 9.5 Configuring the operator interface<br />

9.5 Configuring the operator interface<br />

9-136<br />

12.01<br />

There are 2 ways in which you can modify the existing tool management operator<br />

interface:<br />

9.5.1 To modify the standard lists<br />

S You can configure the parameters variably as a function of tool in the lists<br />

provided.<br />

S You can configure your own lists in addition to the standard lists.<br />

You can make the following changes in the standard lists:<br />

S Change a particular column for all tools.<br />

S Change a particular column for a particular tool.<br />

S Define different columns for each tool.<br />

You must store every change to the list default settings in configuration file<br />

to_mill.ini.<br />

An example of this is given on the application diskette for the PCU 20. You can<br />

adapt this example and then install it with the <strong>ShopMill</strong> software.<br />

For the PCU 50, you will find an example in directory ADD_ON after you have<br />

installed <strong>ShopMill</strong>. You can also adapt this and then store it in directory OEM.<br />

The configuration file will be evaluated only if you set bit 6 in MD 9478<br />

$MM_TO_OPTION_MASK.<br />

Note<br />

You need only define settings which deviate from the default in the<br />

configuration file.<br />

In this regard, please note the following:<br />

S You can define up to 13 columns after the ”DP number” column.<br />

S Define the edge parameters, i.e. length, radius and angle in successive<br />

columns.<br />

S Define either edge parameters or tool parameters, but not both, in one<br />

column. (Tool parameters are all parameters which are not edge parameters.)<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Syntax<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9.5 Configuring the operator interface<br />

The following syntax rules applies to entries in the configuration file (see also<br />

example at end of this section):<br />

First specify the tool management list in which you wish to make changes.<br />

[SCREEN_ID]<br />

SCREEN_ID: Tool management list<br />

Next, define the changes themselves:<br />

S Change a particular column for all tools:<br />

COLUMNx=CONTENT_ID<br />

COLUMN: Column command<br />

x: Column number, max. 13<br />

CONTENT_ID: Parameter or property of tool<br />

S Change a particular column for a particular tool:<br />

TOOL_ID= x=CONTENT_ID<br />

TOOL_ID: Tool type<br />

S Define different columns for each:<br />

TOOL_ID = CONTENT_ID / CONTENT_ID / ...<br />

TOOL_ID = CONTENT_ID / CONTENT_ID / ...<br />

...<br />

Note<br />

9Tool Management<br />

The parameters or properties of a tool are listed consecutively on the basis<br />

of a CONTENT_ID and separated from one another by an oblique symbol<br />

“/”. Even if you want to use the default setting for individual columns, you<br />

must still enter the oblique symbol.<br />

If, for example, you want to change only the last columns, enter the number<br />

(x) of the first column that you wish to alter and then list the appropriate<br />

CONTENT_ID for the following columns.<br />

TOOL_ID = x = CONTENT_ID / CONTENT_ID / ..<br />

Using the COLUMN command, you can first define one column identically for<br />

all tools and then adapt it specifically for individual tools.<br />

You can identify comments by a semicolon (;) symbol.<br />

If errors occur as the configuration file is being evaluated, you will find a description<br />

of the error in file to_ini_f.c om in directory ”Temp”.<br />

9-137


9ToolManagement 9.5 Configuring the operator interface<br />

Identifiers<br />

9-138<br />

The SCREEN_, TOOL_ and CONTENT_IDs which are available for defining<br />

columns are listed below.<br />

Table 9-5 SCREEN_IDENTIFIER<br />

SCREEN_IDENTIFIER Tool management list<br />

TOOL_LIST Tool list<br />

TOOL_LIST_2ND_EDGE Tool list, 2nd edge<br />

TOOL_WEAR Tool wear list<br />

TOOL_WEAR_2ND_EDGE Tool wear list, 2nd edge<br />

TOOL_MAGA Magazine list<br />

Table 9-6 TOOL_IDENTIFIER<br />

TOOL_IDENTIFIER Tool<br />

SHANK_END_CUTTER (End) mill<br />

POINTED_DRILL (Twist) drill<br />

LOCATOR Centering tool<br />

3DTRACER 3D probe<br />

EDGE_TRACER Edge probe<br />

3DCUTTER_110 Cylindrical die mill<br />

3DCUTTER_111 Ball end mill<br />

3DCUTTER_121 End mill with corner rounding<br />

3DCUTTER_155 Bevel cutter<br />

3DCUTTER_156 Bevel cutter with corner rounding<br />

3DCUTTER_157 Tapered die mill<br />

Table 9-7 CONTENT_ID<br />

CONTENT_ID Parameter or property<br />

EMPTY Empty field<br />

NOT_USED Empty column<br />

LENGTH Length<br />

RADIUS Radius<br />

RADIUS_DIAM Radius with possible diameter calculation<br />

ANGLE Angle<br />

N Number of teeth<br />

SPINDLE Spindle direction<br />

COOL1 Cooling water 1<br />

COOL2 Cooling water 2<br />

MFCT1 Customized M function 1<br />

MFCT2 Customized M function 2<br />

MFCT3 Customized M function 3<br />

MFCT4 Customized M function 4<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Example<br />

Table 9-7 CONTENT_ID<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.5 Configuring the operator interface<br />

CONTENT_ID Parameter or property<br />

DLENGTH Wear length<br />

DRADIUS Wear radius<br />

DRADIUS_DIAM Wear radius with possible diameter calculation<br />

T_OR_C Method of wear monitoring<br />

P_TIME Service life<br />

P_COUNT Quantity<br />

T_LOCKED Tool disabled<br />

T_SIZE Oversized tool<br />

T_FIXED Tool in fixed location<br />

P_LOCKED Magazine location disabled<br />

MAG_T_LOCKED Display only: Tool disabled<br />

MAG_T_SIZE Display only: Oversized tool<br />

MAG_T_FIXED Display only: Tool in fixed location<br />

H_NBR Fanuc H number<br />

;Tool list<br />

[TOOL_LIST]<br />

;Column default settings<br />

COLUMN1 = H_NBR<br />

COLUMN2 = LENGTH<br />

COLUMN3 = RADIUS_DIAM<br />

COLUMN4 = EMPTY<br />

COLUMN5 = EMPTY<br />

COLUMN6 = SPINDLE<br />

COLUMN7 = COOL1<br />

COLUMN8 = COOL2<br />

COLUMN9 = MFCT1<br />

COLUMN10= MFCT2<br />

COLUMN11= MFCT3<br />

COLUMN12= MFCT4<br />

;Deviations from default settings<br />

SHANK_END_CUTTER = 5=N<br />

POINTED_DRILL = 4=ANGLE<br />

LOCATOR = 3=EMPTY / ANGLE<br />

3DTRACER =<br />

EDGE_TRACER =<br />

3DCUTTER_110 = 5=N<br />

3DCUTTER_111 = 5=N<br />

3DCUTTER_121 = 5=N<br />

3DCUTTER_155 = 5=N<br />

3DCUTTER_156 = 5=N<br />

3DCUTTER_157 = 5=N<br />

9-139


9ToolManagement 9.5 Configuring the operator interface<br />

9.5.2 Defining an additional list<br />

Define the list<br />

Define texts<br />

9-140<br />

12.01<br />

You can define another list, configured by yourself, on the 3rd horizontal softkey<br />

on the tool management operator interface. You can use the parameters from<br />

the standard lists as well as 6 user-defined parameters in this customized list. (If<br />

you use customized parameters in this extra list, you will also be able to use<br />

them in the standard lists.)<br />

You must activate the list by setting bit 2 of display MD 9478 $MM_TO_OP-<br />

TION_MASK.<br />

You must also set MD 18094 $MN_MM_NUM_CCTDA_PARAM to 8.<br />

Note<br />

Once you have set the two machine data above, you can call a sample list with<br />

2 user-defined parameters by selecting the 3rd horizontal softkey on the tool<br />

management user interface.<br />

Instructions on how to define the customized list can be found in Subsection<br />

9.5.1 “To modify the standard lists”. All these instructions apply equally to customized<br />

lists.<br />

The SCREEN_ID for the customized list is as follows:<br />

Table 9-8 SCREEN_ID<br />

SCREEN_ID Tool management list<br />

TOOL_LIST_OEM Additional list<br />

User-defined parameters have the following CONTENT_ID:<br />

Table 9-9 CONTENT_ID<br />

CONTENT_ID Parameter or property<br />

TPC1 Parameter 1<br />

TPC2 Parameter 2<br />

TPC4 Parameter 4<br />

TPC5 Parameter 5<br />

TPC6 Parameter 6<br />

TPC8 Parameter 8<br />

You assign the texts (softkey name, customized list header, name and associated<br />

cursor text of user-defined parameters) in a text file using special text numbers.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

PCU 20<br />

The relevant syntax is:<br />

[text number] 0 0 “[text]”<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

9ToolManagement 9.5 Configuring the operator interface<br />

The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text<br />

output and must always be set to 0.<br />

The parameter name can comprise 3 lines, each line with its own text number<br />

(see Table 9-10).<br />

Table 9-10 Text assignment<br />

Text type Text number<br />

3rd horizontal softkey 89923<br />

List header 89924<br />

Name of parameter TPC1 89925, 89926, 89927<br />

Cursor text of parameter TPC1 89930<br />

Name of parameter TPC2 89930, 89931, 89932<br />

Cursor text of parameter TPC2 89932<br />

Name of parameter TPC4 89937, 89938, 89939<br />

Cursor text of parameter TPC4 89949<br />

Name of parameter TPC5 89940, 89941, 89942<br />

Cursor text of parameter TPC5 89950<br />

Name of parameter TPC6 89943, 89944, 89945<br />

Cursor text of parameter TPC6 89951<br />

Name of parameter TPC8 89946, 89947, 89948<br />

Cursor text of parameter TPC8 89952<br />

Example:<br />

89924 0 0 ”Tool data”<br />

The maximum permissible number of characters for the different text types are<br />

as follows:<br />

Softkey: 9<br />

Header: 20<br />

Parameter: 7<br />

Cursor text: 45<br />

A line break in the softkey text can be made by inserting two consecutive<br />

blanks.<br />

Note<br />

Some texts are already set to defaults which you can change.<br />

For the PCU 20 enter the texts and numbers in text file “aluc.txt”. A “aluc.txt” text<br />

file is stored in every language directory.<br />

9-141


9ToolManagement 9.5 Configuring the operator interface<br />

PCU 50<br />

9-142<br />

12.01<br />

For the PCU 50 enter the texts and numbers in text file<br />

C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_xx.com. The file “aluc_xx.com” may have to be created in the<br />

directory “cus.dir”.<br />

The text language is assigned via the name of the text file. “xx” is replaced by<br />

one of the following abbreviations in the text file name:<br />

Table 9-11 Language assignment<br />

Abbreviation<br />

xx<br />

Language<br />

gr German<br />

uk English<br />

fr French<br />

it Italian<br />

sp Spanish<br />

nl Dutch<br />

fi Finnish<br />

sw Swedish<br />

pl Polish<br />

tr Turkish<br />

ch Czech<br />

tw Taiwan Chinese<br />

ko Korean<br />

hu Hungarian<br />

po Portuguese<br />

ru Cyrillic<br />

cz Czech<br />

yes Japanese<br />

Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file C:\user\mbdde.ini:<br />

UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

J


Measuring Cycles<br />

10.1 Brief description<br />

Overview You can use measuring cycles for automatic measuring on vertical machining<br />

centers and universal milling machines with <strong>ShopMill</strong>.<br />

Measuring cycles<br />

For this you need to connect a touch trigger probe to the control.<br />

The measuring cycles are shipped with <strong>ShopMill</strong> and contained in the <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Toolbox.<br />

You need to adapt the measuring cycle data to the actual conditions of the<br />

machine and make an initial assignment.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

10<br />

10-143


10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.2 Probe connection<br />

10.2 Probe connection<br />

Probe connection<br />

10-144<br />

12.01<br />

A maximum of two sensors can be connected to the <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong> via the<br />

X121 I/O interface, which is located on the front panel of the CCU module.<br />

CCU1<br />

X121<br />

Fig. 10-1 Probe connection to X121 on CCU module<br />

Cable distributor<br />

Probe<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

I/O interface (X121)<br />

The probe is connected via a 37-pin D-Sub pin connector (X121).<br />

The 24 V load power supply is also connected on this connector.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.2 Probe connection<br />

Table 10-1 Extract from PIN assignment table for X121 front connectors<br />

PIN Designation<br />

External power supply<br />

1 M24EXT External ground<br />

2 M24EXT External ground<br />

... ... ...<br />

Connection probe 1<br />

9 MEPUS 0 Measuring pulse signal input<br />

10 MEPUC 0 Measuring pulse common input<br />

... ... ...<br />

External power supply<br />

20 P24EXT Current 24 V external<br />

21 P24EXT Current 24 V external<br />

... ... ...<br />

Connection probe 2<br />

28 MEPUS 1 Measuring pulse signal input<br />

29 MEPUC 1 Measuring pulse common input<br />

... ... ...<br />

10-145


10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.3 Functional check<br />

10.3 Functional check<br />

Measuring command The measuring cycles operate internally with the MEAS command.<br />

References: /PGA/, Programming Guide<br />

PLC service<br />

display<br />

10-146<br />

The functional test for the probe is conducted via an NC program.<br />

The measuring signal can be controlled after the end of the program via the<br />

diagnostics menu “PLC status”.<br />

Table 10-2 Status display for measuring signal<br />

Probe 1 deflected DB 10 DB B107.0<br />

Probe 2 deflected DB 10 DB B107.1<br />

Status display<br />

-,...<br />

DBX107.0 and 107.1 Probe activated<br />

Data block Signal(s) from axis/spindle (drive_PLC)<br />

Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclically Signal(s) valid as of SW: 1.1<br />

Signal state 1 or edge<br />

change 0 - - ->1<br />

Probe 1 or 2 is activated.<br />

Signal state 0 or edge<br />

change 1 - - -> 0<br />

Probe 1 or 2 is not activated.<br />

References /PHD/, NCU 571-573 Manual<br />

/PHF/, NCU 570 Manual<br />

Note The above mentioned signal states correspond to the default setting (non-deflected 0 V;<br />

deflected 24 V). Otherwise, the measurement input No. must be entered as a negative<br />

number.<br />

Example of<br />

functional test<br />

%_N_PRUEF_MESSTASTER_MPF<br />

;$PATH=/_N_MPF_DIR<br />

;Testing program probe connection<br />

N05 DEF INT MTSIGNAL ;Flag for<br />

;actuation state<br />

12.01<br />

N10 DEF INT ME_NR=1 ;Measuring input number<br />

N20 DEF REAL MEASVAL_IN_X<br />

N30 G17 T1 D1 ;Preset tool offset for<br />

;probe<br />

N40 _ANF: G0 G90 X0 F150 ;Start position and<br />

;measuring velocity<br />

N50 MEAS=ME_NR G1 X100 ;Measurement at measuring<br />

input 1<br />

; in the X axis<br />

N60 STOPRE<br />

N70 MTSIGNAL=$AC_MEA[1] ;Reading switching signal<br />

;implemented in SW<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.3 Functional check<br />

N80<br />

;software at 1st<br />

measuring input<br />

IF MTSIGNAL == 0 GOTOF _FEHL1 ;Signal evaluation<br />

N90 MESSWERT_IN_X=$AA_MW[X] ;Read measured value<br />

;in workpiece coordinates<br />

N95 M0<br />

N100 M02<br />

N110 _FEHL1: MSG (“Probe not switching!”)<br />

N120 M0<br />

N130 M02<br />

10-147


10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.4 Start-up sequences<br />

10.4 Start-up sequences<br />

10.4.1 Start-up flowchart for probe activation<br />

10-148<br />

Start-up of<br />

measuring cycles on<br />

the control<br />

2<br />

Start<br />

Connect the signal lead<br />

of the probe to the I/O interface X121<br />

or X1 (according to the control type)<br />

no<br />

no<br />

Fig. 10-2 Start-up flowchart - Fig. 1<br />

Check measuring function<br />

using<br />

the PRUEF_MESSTASTER<br />

testing program<br />

Single block ?<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

1<br />

yes<br />

Override to zero ?<br />

yes<br />

Load and preselect<br />

PRUEF_MESSTASTER<br />

program


12.01<br />

2<br />

Let NC block be<br />

executed<br />

Fig. 10-3 Start-up flowchart - Fig. 2<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

no<br />

10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.4 Start-up sequences<br />

1<br />

NC START<br />

Is a measuring block with<br />

MEAS present ?<br />

yes<br />

Does the measuring<br />

block disappear without<br />

the probe being<br />

deflected?<br />

yes<br />

There are pulses on the<br />

measuring lead!<br />

Cause:<br />

Could be interference<br />

Remedy:<br />

Check probe connection<br />

or measuring lead not<br />

grounded<br />

Override is zero,<br />

Distance to go reached,<br />

Activate probe manually<br />

3<br />

no<br />

Measuring input 1: DB10 DB B107.0<br />

Measuring input 2: DB10 DB B107.1<br />

10-149


10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.4 Start-up sequences<br />

10-150<br />

Contact service dept.<br />

Fig. 10-4 Start-up flowchart - Fig. 3<br />

2<br />

no<br />

no<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

3<br />

Does the bit change<br />

with probe deflection<br />

from “0” to “1”?<br />

yes<br />

Has the distance to go<br />

been deleted and entered<br />

in MEASVAL_IN_X?<br />

End<br />

yes


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.5 Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence<br />

10.5 Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence<br />

10.5.1 Machine data for adapting the probe<br />

Machine data for<br />

adapting the probe<br />

13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE [0]<br />

MD number Switching performance of the probe at measuring input 1<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Change valid after POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BOOLEAN Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: Value 0: (default setting)<br />

non-deflected state 0 V<br />

deflected state 24 V<br />

Value 1: non-deflected state 24 V<br />

deflected state 0 V<br />

13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE [1]<br />

MD number Switching performance of the probe at measuring input 2<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Change valid after POWER ON Protection level: 2/7 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BOOLEAN Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: Value 0: (default setting)<br />

non-deflected state 0 V<br />

deflected state 24 V<br />

Value 1: non-deflected state 24 V<br />

deflected state 0 V<br />

10-151


10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.5 Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence<br />

10.5.2 Display machine data for measuring cycles<br />

9750 CMM_MEAS_PROBE_INPUT<br />

MD number Measuring input for a workpiece probe<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BOOL Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the measuring input for a workpiece probe.<br />

0 = Measuring input 1 is activated<br />

1 = Measuring input 2 is activated<br />

9751 CMM_MEAS_T_PROBE_INPUT<br />

MD number Measuring input for tool probe<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BOOL Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the measuring input for a tool probe.<br />

0 = Measuring input 1 is activated<br />

1 = Measuring input 2 is activated<br />

10-152<br />

12.01<br />

9752 CMM_MEASURING_DISTANCE<br />

MD number Maximum measurement path (before and after the measuring point) for automatic<br />

measurement in the program.<br />

Default setting: 5 Min. input limit: 0.01 Max. input limit: 1000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the maximum measurement path for “Tool measurement” before and after<br />

the expected switching position (workpiece edge) and applies for automatic programmed<br />

measurements. If no switching signal is output within the area, the error message “probe<br />

does not switch” is output.<br />

9753 CMM_MEAS_DIST_MAN<br />

MD number Maximum measurement path for manual measurement (before and after the measuring<br />

point)<br />

Default setting: 10 Min. input limit: 0.01 Max. input limit: 1000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the maximum measurement path for “Tool measurement” for manual<br />

mode before and after the expected switching position (workpiece edge). If no switching<br />

signal is output within the area, the error message “probe does not switch” is output.<br />

9754 CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_LENGTH<br />

MD number Maximum measurement path for tool length (before and after measuring point)<br />

Default setting: 2 Min. input limit: 0.001 Max. input limit: 1000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the maximum measurement path for “Tool measurement” for measuring<br />

the tool length of a rotating spindle before and after the expected switching position (tool<br />

length). If no switching signal is output within the area, the error message “probe does not<br />

switch” is output.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.5 Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence<br />

9755 CMM_MEAS_DIST_TOOL_RADIUS<br />

MD number Maximum measurement path for tool radius (before and after measuring point)<br />

Default setting: 1 Min. input limit: 0.001 Max. input limit: 1000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the maximum measurement path for “Tool measurement” for measuring<br />

the tool radius of a rotating spindle before and after the expected switching position (tool<br />

radius). If no switching signal is output within the area, the error message “probe does not<br />

switch” is output.<br />

9756 CMM_MEASURING_FEED<br />

MD number Measuring feed<br />

Default setting: 300 Min. input limit: 10 Max. input limit: 5000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defined the measuring feed for “Tool measurement” and for “Tool measurement”<br />

with spindle at standstill.<br />

9757 CMM_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL<br />

MD number Feed in the plane with collision monitoring<br />

Default setting: 1000 Min. input limit: 10 Max. input limit: 5000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: To protect the probe, intermediate positions are approached with this feed in the plane as<br />

measuring blocks to monitor for collisions. This feed must be selected such that the<br />

maximum deflection of the probe is not exceeded should a collision occur.<br />

9758 CMM_POS_FEED_WITH_COLL_CTRL<br />

MD number Infeed with collision monitoring<br />

Default setting: 1000 Min. input limit: 10 Max. input limit: 5000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: To protect the probe, intermediate positions are approached with this feed in the tool axis<br />

as measuring blocks to monitor for collisions. This feed must be selected such that the<br />

maximum deflection of the probe is not exceeded should a collision occur.<br />

9759 CMM_MAX_CIRC_SPEED_ROT_SP<br />

MD number Maximum circumferential speed for tool measurement with rotating spindle<br />

Default setting: 100 Min. input limit: 1 Max. input limit: 200<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: m/min<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: For tool measurement with rotating spindle, this MD defines the maximum circumferential<br />

speed of the tools to be measured. The permissible spindle speed for carrying out the tool<br />

measurement is calculated according to the MD.<br />

10-153


10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.5 Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence<br />

9760 CMM_MAX_SPIND_SPEED_ROT_SP<br />

MD number Maximum speed for tool measurement with rotating spindle<br />

Default setting: 1000 Min. input limit: 100 Max. input limit: 25000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: rpm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: For tool measurement with rotating spindle, this MD defines the maximum permissible<br />

speed of the tools to be measured.<br />

9761 CMM_MIN_FEED_ROT_SP<br />

MD number Minimum feed for tool measurement with rotating spindle<br />

Default setting: 10 Min. input limit: 0.01 Max. input limit: 1000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm/min<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD describes the minimum feed for “Measuring tool with rotating spindle”. Tools<br />

which have a very large radius and require high precision would otherwise have a very<br />

small feed.<br />

9762 CMM_MEAS_TOL_ROT_SP<br />

MD number Measuring accuracy for tool measurements with rotating spindle<br />

Default setting: 0.01 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 1<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the desired accuracy of measurement for “Measuring a tool with rotating<br />

spindle”.<br />

9763 CMM_TOOL_PROBE_TYPE<br />

MD number Type of tool probe<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 999<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: WORD Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the type of tool probe.<br />

10-154<br />

Type Probe system<br />

0 Measuring cube<br />

101 Measuring disk in XY (1st and 2nd geometry axis)<br />

201 Measuring disk in ZX (3rd and 1st geometry axis)<br />

301 Measuring disk in YZ (2nd and 3rd geometry axis)<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.5 Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence<br />

9764 CMM_TOOL_PROBE_ALLOW_AXIS<br />

MD number Permissible axis directions for tool probe (ZYX)<br />

Default setting: 133 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 333<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: WORD Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the permissible axes and the axis directions in which measurements can<br />

be taken at the tool probe.<br />

The number to be specified is made up of ZYX. The following attributes can be specified<br />

for each axis:<br />

0 not possible<br />

1 only in minus direction<br />

2 only in plus direction<br />

3 in both directions<br />

Sample application: Default setting 133 means<br />

1st number: 1 Measuring in Z possible in both directions<br />

2nd number: 3 Measuring in Y possible in both directions<br />

3rd number: 3 Measuring in X possible in both directions<br />

9765 CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_LENGTH_MEA<br />

MD number Diameter of tool probe for length measurement<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the active diameter or the active edge of the tool probe for measurement<br />

of the tool length.<br />

9766 CMM_T_PROBE_DIAM_RAD_MEAS<br />

MD number Diameter of tool probe for radius measurement<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the effective diameter or the effective edge of the tool probe for the radius<br />

measurement.<br />

9767 CMM_T_PROBE_DIST_RAD_MEAS<br />

MD number Infeed from top edge of tool probe for radius measurement<br />

Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 100000<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: mm<br />

Data type: DOUBLE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the distance between the top edge of the tool probe and the bottom edge<br />

of the tool for the radius measurement.<br />

10-155


10 Measuring Cycles<br />

10.5 Machine data for the measuring cycles sequence<br />

9768 CMM_T_PROBE_APPROACH_DIR<br />

MD number Plane approach direction, tool at tool probe<br />

Default setting: -1 Min. input limit: -2 Max. input limit: 2<br />

Change applies from: IMMEDIATE Protection level: 3/4 Unit: -<br />

Data type: BYTE Valid as of SW:<br />

<strong>840D</strong> SW 4.3, <strong>810D</strong> SW 2.3<br />

Meaning: This MD defines the direction of an approach in the plane which the tool takes to the tool<br />

probe.<br />

10-156<br />

Value Approach direction<br />

-1 1st plane axis in minus direction<br />

+1 1st plane axis in plus direction<br />

-2 2nd plane axis in minus direction<br />

+2 2nd plane axis in plus direction<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

J


Network Link<br />

11.1 General description<br />

Option<br />

Function<br />

The “Manage Network/Diskette Drive” function is an option available under order<br />

number 6FC5 463-0FA03-0AA0.<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> can set up a network management function in the Program Manager<br />

operating area. You can use it to display directories and files<br />

S stored on a server,<br />

S stored, for example, in an archive directory on the hard disk,<br />

S imported via a diskette drive.<br />

A maximum of 5 softkeys are provided for this purpose on the horizontal softkey<br />

menu in the Program Manager operating area. Softkey “NC” (1st softkey) has a<br />

pre-configured function and is used to display the directories and files on the<br />

NC and the data management directory on the hard disk. The other 4 softkeys<br />

can be configured freely via display machine data.<br />

To install the network, please see<br />

References: /IAM/, IM2, Installation and Startup of HMI Embedded<br />

IM4, Installation and Startup of HMI Advanced.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

11<br />

11-157


11 Network Link<br />

11.2 Linking Windows network drives to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

11.2 Linking Windows network drives to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Setting up the network<br />

management<br />

11.2.1 PCU 20<br />

Define the drive<br />

names<br />

Example<br />

Enter the drive<br />

paths<br />

11-158<br />

12.01<br />

A total of 4 softkeys are provided on the horizontal softkey menu in the <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

“Program Manager” operating area for configuring the network management<br />

function. Softkeys 2 to 5 can be configured freely via display machine data.<br />

Note<br />

Note that the directories of servers can only be linked if they are available.<br />

Proceed as follows to link the Windows network drives:<br />

Enter the drive names for the 2nd to 5th softkeys of the horizontal softkey menu<br />

in text file aluc.txt.<br />

The relevant syntax is:<br />

[text number] 0 0 “[softkey text]”<br />

You must assign the softkey texts to the following text numbers:<br />

Softkey 2: 89901<br />

Softkey 3: 89902<br />

Softkey 4: 89903<br />

Softkey 5: 89904<br />

The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text<br />

output and must always be set to 0.<br />

Note<br />

A line break in the softkey text can be made by inserting two consecutive<br />

blanks. You can use up to 9 characters per line.<br />

A “aluc.txt” text file is stored in every language directory.<br />

In the Program Manager of <strong>ShopMill</strong>, the 2nd horizontal softkey must be assigned<br />

the name ”NETZ1” in German.<br />

The following entry must be made in text file “aluc_txt”:<br />

89901 0 0 “NETZ1”<br />

Enter the drive path of the relevant softkey in display MD 9676 to 9679.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Example<br />

11.2.2 PCU 50<br />

Define the drive<br />

names<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

11 Network Link<br />

11.2 Linking Windows network drives to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

The following display machine data are available:<br />

Softkey 2: MD 9676 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1<br />

Softkey3: MD 9677 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2<br />

Softkey4: MD 9678 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3<br />

Softkey5: MD 9679 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4<br />

The display machine data are described in Section 6 ”Machine Data”.<br />

The directory Workpieces_1 stored on server 1 must be displayed via the 2nd<br />

horizontal softkey labeled ”NETZ1”.<br />

The following must then be entered in MD 9676: \\Server1\Workpieces_1.<br />

Proceed as follows to link the Windows network drives:<br />

Enter the drive names for the 2nd to 5th softkeys of the horizontal softkey menu<br />

in text file C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_xx.com. The file “aluc_xx.com” must be created in<br />

the directory “cus.dir”.<br />

The relevant syntax is:<br />

[text number] 0 0 “[softkey text]”<br />

The softkeys are assigned to the following text numbers in the file<br />

“aluc_xx.com”:<br />

Softkey 2: 89901<br />

Softkey 3: 89902<br />

Softkey 4: 89903<br />

Softkey 5: 89904<br />

The two parameters 2 and 3 separated by blanks are control characters for text<br />

output and must always be set to 0.<br />

Note<br />

A line break in the softkey text can be made by inserting two consecutive<br />

blanks. You can use up to 9 characters per line.<br />

The text language is assigned via the name of the text file. “xx” is replaced by<br />

one of the following abbreviations in the text file name:<br />

Table 11-1 Language assignment<br />

Abbreviation<br />

xx<br />

Language<br />

gr German<br />

uk English<br />

fr French<br />

it Italian<br />

sp Spanish<br />

nl Dutch<br />

11-159


11 Network Link<br />

11.2 Linking Windows network drives to <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Example<br />

Enter the drive<br />

paths<br />

Example<br />

11-160<br />

Table 11-1 Language assignment<br />

Abbreviation<br />

xx<br />

Language<br />

fi Finnish<br />

sw Swedish<br />

pl Polish<br />

tr Turkish<br />

ch Czech<br />

tw Taiwan Chinese<br />

ko Korean<br />

hu Hungarian<br />

po Portuguese<br />

ru Cyrillic<br />

cz Czech<br />

yes Japanese<br />

Add the following line in section [TextFiles} of file C:\user\mbdde.ini:<br />

UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_<br />

12.01<br />

In the Program Manager of <strong>ShopMill</strong>, the 2nd horizontal softkey must be assigned<br />

the name ”NETZ1” in German.<br />

The following entry must be made in text file “aluc_gr.com”:<br />

89901 0 0 “NETZ1”<br />

In the file C:\user\mbdde.ini, you must add the following line to the section [Text-<br />

Files]:<br />

UserZYK=C:\dh\cus.dir\aluc_<br />

Enter the drive path of the relevant softkey in display MD 9676 to 9679.<br />

The following display machine data are available:<br />

Softkey 2: MD 9676 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1<br />

Softkey3: MD 9677 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2<br />

Softkey4: MD 9678 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3<br />

Softkey5: MD 9679 $MM_CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4<br />

The display machine data are described in Section 6 ”Machine Data”.<br />

The directory Workpieces_1 stored on server 1 must be displayed via the 2nd<br />

horizontal softkey labeled ”NETZ1”.<br />

The following must then be entered in MD 9676: \\Server1\Workpieces_1.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

J


Access Protection via Password and<br />

Keyswitch<br />

12.1 General<br />

Access rights<br />

Table 12-1 Access protection<br />

User access to programs, data and functions is restricted on the basis of<br />

8 hierarchical protection levels. These are divided into (see Table 12-1):<br />

S 4 password levels for Siemens, machine manufacturers and end users and<br />

S 4 keyswitch settings for end users<br />

A multi-level safety system for controlling access rights is thus provided.<br />

Protection<br />

level Type User Access to (examples)<br />

0 Pass- Siemens All functions, programs and data<br />

word<br />

1 Pass- Machine manufacturer: Defined functions, programs and data;<br />

word Development E.g.: Enter options<br />

2 Pass- Machine manufacturer: Defined functions, programs and data;<br />

word Start-up engineer E.g.: Most machine data settings<br />

3 Pass- End user: Assigned functions, programs and data;<br />

word Service<br />

4 Key- End user: Less than protection level 0 to 3;<br />

switch Programmer As defined by machine manufacturer or<br />

Setting 3 Machine setter End user<br />

5 Key- End user: Less than protection level 0 to 3;<br />

switch Qualified operator, defined by end user<br />

Setting 2 who is not a programmer<br />

6 Key- End user: Example:<br />

switch Trained operator, Selection of programs, input of tool wear data<br />

Setting 1 who is not a programmer and zero offsets<br />

7 Key- End user: Example:<br />

switch Semi-skilled operator No inputs or program selection<br />

Setting 0 permitted, inputs via machine control panel only<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

12<br />

Decreasing<br />

access rights<br />

12-161


12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch<br />

12.1 General<br />

Access protection<br />

system<br />

12-162<br />

S Protection level 0 offers the highest access authorization and protection<br />

level 7 the lowest.<br />

12.01<br />

S If a particular access right is assigned to a protection level, then the same<br />

right will be automatically available on all higher protection levels.<br />

S By the same token, an access right for a particular protection level can only<br />

be changed from a higher protection level.<br />

S The access rights on protection levels 0 to 3 are set as Siemens defaults.<br />

S Access authorization is set through scanning of the current keyswitch<br />

position and a comparison of password entries. In this case, a password<br />

entry overwrites the access rights associated with the keyswitch position.<br />

S Options can be saved on all protection levels, but option data can only be<br />

input on protection levels 0 and 1.<br />

S The access rights for protection levels 4 to 7 are merely suggested settings<br />

and can be altered by the machine manufacturer or end user.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

12.2 Password<br />

Set password<br />

Reset<br />

password<br />

Permitted<br />

characters<br />

Default passwords<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch<br />

12.2 Password<br />

The passwords for the 4 available password levels with their respective<br />

access authorization can be entered in the DIAGNOSIS operating area through<br />

selection of softkey SET PASSWORD.<br />

References: /BA/, “Operator’s Guide”<br />

Please note that a password remains valid until the access authorization<br />

is intentionally reset again by means of softkey DELETE PASSWORD.<br />

In other words, the access authorization is not automatically deleted by a<br />

POWER ON!<br />

Up to 8 characters can be used in the password. We recommend that you<br />

restrict yourself to the character set of the operator panel in selecting a password.<br />

In passwords with less than 8 characters, the remaining characters are<br />

interpreted as blanks.<br />

The following default passwords are defined for protection levels 1 to 3:<br />

Protection level 1 SUNRISE<br />

Protection level 2 EVENING<br />

Protection level 3 CUSTOMER<br />

Note<br />

These passwords are entered as the defaults on system power-up in start-up<br />

mode (NCK start-up switch in position 1).<br />

The default passwords should be changed in order to guarantee reliable access<br />

protection.<br />

12-163


12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch<br />

12.3 Keyswitch positions (DB10, DBX56.4 to 7)<br />

12.3 Keyswitch positions (DB10, DBX56.4 to 7)<br />

Keyswitch<br />

Application of<br />

keyswitch<br />

Control of PLC<br />

user program<br />

12-164<br />

12.01<br />

The keyswitch on the <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> or <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> FM-NC has<br />

4 positions to which protection levels 4 to 7 are assigned. The keyswitch is operated<br />

by 3 colored keys that can be removed from the lock in different positions<br />

(see Table 12-2). Functions can be assigned to the key positions by the machine<br />

manufacturer or end user. Access to programs, data and functions can be<br />

set user-specifically in machine data (see Section 12.4 ” Machine data for protection<br />

levels”).<br />

The keyswitch positions are transferred to the PLC interface (interface signals<br />

“Keyswitch positions 0 to 3” (DB10, DBX56.4 to 7)) for evaluation by the PLC<br />

user program.<br />

Keyswitch position 0 has access rights of the lowest priority and position 3 access<br />

rights of the highest priority. For example, all data which can be changed in<br />

positions 0, 1 or 2, can also be changed in keyswitch position 3.<br />

The keyswitch can be used to inhibit access to certain data areas. This protective<br />

function can be used, for example, to prevent the operator from making unintentional<br />

changes to geometry data (e.g. zero offsets) or activating program<br />

controls (e.g. selection of dry run feedrate).<br />

Table 12-2 Keyswitch positions 0 to 3<br />

Switch position Key removal position DB10, DBB 56 Protection level<br />

Position 0 - Bit 4 7<br />

Position 1 0or1 Bit 5 6<br />

Black key<br />

Position 2 0or1or2 Bit 6 5<br />

Green key<br />

Position 3<br />

0or1or2<br />

or 3<br />

Red key<br />

Bit 7 4<br />

The PLC interface signals (“Keyswitch positions 0 to 3”) can be input either<br />

directly via the keyswitch on the machine control panel or by the PLC user program.<br />

Only one interface signal may be set at a time. If several interface signals<br />

are set simultaneously, keyswitch position 3 is activated internally in the control.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

12.4 Machine data for protection levels<br />

Lockable<br />

data areas<br />

Default setting<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch<br />

12.4 Machine data for protection levels<br />

The machine manufacturer or end user can set MMC machine data to assign<br />

the appropriate protection levels to individual functions and data areas. For a<br />

number of data types, it is possible to input different protection levels for read<br />

and write access authority.<br />

The machine data which can be “locked” by means of protection levels in<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> are listed below:<br />

Operator panel machine data Access to<br />

9182 USER_CLASS_INCH_METRIC Inch/metric switchover<br />

9200 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA Read tool offsets<br />

9201 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO Write tool geometry<br />

(including type and tool edge)<br />

9202 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR Write tool wear (without<br />

limit value)<br />

9210 USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA Write settable zero<br />

offsets<br />

9215 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA Write setting data<br />

9217 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PROGRAM Write/edit part programs<br />

9218 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM Enable program selection<br />

9222 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA Write R parameters<br />

9252 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLLOAD Enable tool load<br />

9253 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLUNLOAD Enable tool unload<br />

9258 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCNEWTOOL Enable create a new tool<br />

9259 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCDELTOOL Enable delete a tool<br />

These machine data are assigned protection level 7 per default during the standard<br />

start-up procedure. All these data areas and functions can thus be<br />

accessed and altered in keyswitch position 0.<br />

The protection level defaults may need to be changed by the machine manufacturer<br />

or end user. They can also be set to protection levels 0 to 3.<br />

J<br />

12-165


12 Access Protection via Password and Keyswitch<br />

12.4 Machine data for protection levels<br />

12-166<br />

Notes<br />

12.01<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


Miscellaneous<br />

13.1 Configuring the customer booting display<br />

13.1.1 PCU 20<br />

You can create your own customer display (company logo, etc.) which will be<br />

displayed when the control system is being booted.<br />

Please proceed as follows to configure the customer boot screen:<br />

1. Create your own boot screen in 16-color mode. The maximum screen size is<br />

224x224 pixels for the OP010/OP010C/OP010S and 352x352 pixels for the<br />

OP015.<br />

2. Save the boot screen in bitmap format under the name<br />

CUSTOM.BMP.<br />

3. Start the file app_inst.exe (see Subsection 2.2.1 “Starting up <strong>ShopMill</strong> on a<br />

PCU 20”).<br />

4. Select “Modify configuration”.<br />

5. Select “Add user specific files to the application”.<br />

6. Enter the path of file CUSTOM.BMP.<br />

Your customized boot screen is added to the application software.<br />

7. Return to the main menu with Esc.<br />

8. Finish installing the software on the PC card (see Subsection 2.2.1 “Starting<br />

up <strong>ShopMill</strong> on a PCU 20”).<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

13<br />

9. Load the PC card to the PCU 20 (see Subsection 2.2.1 “Starting up <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

onaPCU20”).<br />

10. Set MD 9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE to the value 1.<br />

13-167


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.1 Configuring the customer booting display<br />

13.1.2 PCU 50<br />

13-168<br />

You can create your own customer display (company logo, etc.) which will be<br />

displayed when the control system is being booted.<br />

Please proceed as follows to configure the customer power-up display:<br />

12.01<br />

1. Create your own boot screen in 16-color mode. The maximum screen size is<br />

224x224 pixels or the OP010/OP010C/OP010S and 352x352 pixels or the<br />

OP015.<br />

2. Save the boot screen in bitmap format under the name CUSTOM.BMP.<br />

3. Copy the file CUSTOM.BMP to the directory C:\MMC0W32\BIN.<br />

4. Set MD 9675 $MM_CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE to the value 1.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

13.2 Configuring the user screenform<br />

Access softkeys<br />

Screen form<br />

position<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.2 Configuring the user screenform<br />

Using the “Expand the Operator Interface” tools, you can create your own user<br />

forms representing specific functional expansions (e.g. your own cycles and<br />

measuring cycles) or simply create your own screen form layout.<br />

References: /IAM/, HMI Installation and Start-Up Guide, BE1 Expand the<br />

Operator Interface<br />

Cycles generated using the “Expand the Operator Interface” function can be<br />

displayed and edited in the machining plan, but not represented as a programming<br />

graphic.<br />

You can call your own screen forms by means of the following access softkeys:<br />

Machine Manual basic display: Horizontal softkey 8<br />

Machine Auto basic display: Horizontal softkey 6<br />

Messages/alarms basic display: Horizontal softkeys 7 and 8<br />

Tools/zero offsets basic display: Horizontal softkey 7<br />

Note<br />

If you assign one of your own cycles to horizontal softkey 8 in the Machine<br />

Manual basic display, the generated NC code is collected and you can then<br />

start the cycle with ”Cycle Start”.<br />

You can call your own cycles by means of the following access softkeys:<br />

Program basic display: Drilling: Vertical softkey 6<br />

Milling: Vertical softkey 6<br />

Miscellaneous: Vertical softkey 4<br />

When you program a cycle, it is subsequently transferred to the <strong>ShopMill</strong> program.<br />

You can use the following entry softkeys to reveal your own measuring cycles,<br />

which are to replace the <strong>ShopMill</strong> measuring cycles:<br />

Basic display manual: Zero point workpiece: Vertical softkeys 1 to 7<br />

Measure tool: Vertical softkeys 1 to 7<br />

Program basic display: Miscellaneous:<br />

Zero point workpiece: Vertical softkeys 1 to 7<br />

Measure tool: Vertical softkeys 1 to 7<br />

If you wish to display your user screen forms/cycles instead of the machining<br />

plan or programming graphic, you must enter the following for screen form property<br />

“Dimension”:<br />

Distance from left: 33<br />

Distance from top: 52<br />

Width: 525<br />

Height: 378<br />

//M(XYZ///33,50,523,380)<br />

13-169


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.2 Configuring the user screenform<br />

13.2.1 Linking user-configured cycles into the machining plan<br />

Example<br />

13-170<br />

12.01<br />

If you wish to link user-configured cycles to existing program steps in the machining<br />

plan, it is essential that you configure the variables described below.<br />

You must first define three variables which are not assigned until the program<br />

step is inserted in the machining plan, i.e. the attribute must be assigned invisibly<br />

(wr0) to the input field of each variable. The variable sequence is as follows:<br />

1. Variable for the next tool, data type String (S)<br />

2. Variable for the position identifier in objects, data type Integer<br />

3. Variable for the sequencer text to be displayed later in the <strong>ShopMill</strong> machining<br />

plan, data type String (S).<br />

A value is best assigned to this variable in a LOAD method.<br />

Two variables for cycles processing must also be defined as well as one variable<br />

for each toggle field which has a different display content on the interface<br />

(e.g. mm/rev) than the internally transferred quantity (e.g. 1).<br />

These variables do not have their own input field, i.e. the attribute must also be<br />

assigned invisibly (wr0). The placement of the variables is optional.<br />

Note<br />

When an OUTPUT method is used, all variables described above must be<br />

configured within this method so that they can all be interpreted on<br />

recompilation.<br />

The toolbox contains a sample cycle named E_DR_O1.SPF. The associated<br />

operator interface is configured in file E_DR_O1.COM. The German and<br />

English texts are stored in files E_DR_TXD.COM and E_DR_TXE.COM respectively.<br />

For information about installing the cycle, please refer to file readme.txt.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

13.2.2 Incorporating own measuring cycles<br />

Example<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.2 Configuring the user screenform<br />

When configuring your own measuring cycles, the vertical softkey 8 (VSK8) is<br />

assigned a special meaning in the new cycles mask. All actions that the new<br />

measuring cycle are to perform when the “NC Start” key is pressed must be<br />

defined in a PRESS method for VSK8. If the “NC Start” key is pressed, NC code<br />

is generated, and written to a program where it is processed; i.e. the function<br />

Generate Code (GC) must be programmed in the PRESS method for VSK8 if<br />

necessary. This, in turn means that an OUTPUT method must be defined.<br />

Note<br />

The VSK8 must not be pressed by the operator but is triggered internally when<br />

the “NC Start” key is pressed. It should therefore not be labeled.<br />

The toolbox contains a sample measuring cycle named E_DR_O1.SPF. The<br />

associated operator interface is configured in file E_DR_O1.COM. The German<br />

and English texts are stored in files E_MS_TXD.COM and E_MS_TXE.COM<br />

respectively.<br />

For information about installing the cycle, please refer to file readme.txt.<br />

13-171


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.3 Cylinder surface transformation<br />

13.3 Cylinder surface transformation<br />

13.3.1 Function<br />

Option<br />

General<br />

13-172<br />

12.01<br />

The cylinder surface transformation function can be used only if “Tracyl” (optional)<br />

has been set as a standard function.<br />

The Order No. is: 6FC5 251-0AB01-0AA0.<br />

The cylinder surface transformation is required in order to machine the following<br />

on cylindrical bodies:<br />

S Longitudinal grooves<br />

S Transverse grooves<br />

S Any type of groove contour.<br />

The groove contour is programmed in relation to the developed, plane surface<br />

of the cylinder. The program can include line/circle, drilling or milling cycles or<br />

profiling (free contour programming).<br />

There are two variants of cylinder surface transformation, i.e.<br />

S with groove wall offset (ON)<br />

S without groove wall offset (OFF).<br />

Longitudinal groove Transverse groove Longitudinal groove with parallel<br />

limitation and groove wall offset<br />

without groove wall offset<br />

Fig. 13-1 Grooves with and without groove wall offset<br />

The cylinder surface transformation function is selected and deselected via softkey<br />

“Miscellaneous”, “Transformations”, “Cylinder surface” on the <strong>ShopMill</strong> interface<br />

and described in:<br />

References: /BAS/, <strong>ShopMill</strong> Operation/Programming <strong>ShopMill</strong>.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

13.3.2 Example of how to set an axis configuration<br />

Example<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.3 Cylinder surface transformation<br />

The following example illustrates how to set the axis configuration on a machine.<br />

Key:<br />

X Axis is parallel to rotary axis<br />

Y Supplementary axis<br />

Z Infeed axis perpendicular to rotary axis<br />

A Rotary axis<br />

C Workspindle<br />

X<br />

Fig. 13-2 Groove machining on cylinder surface with X-C-Z kinematics<br />

You must configure 2 data blocks with the following machine data for the machine<br />

illustrated above:<br />

20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4]=5<br />

Number of channel axes<br />

20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0]=“XC”<br />

Channel axis XC<br />

20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[1]=“YC”<br />

Channel axis YC<br />

20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[2]=“ZC”<br />

Channel axis ZC<br />

20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[3]=“A”<br />

Channel axis A<br />

20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[4]=“C”<br />

Channel axis C<br />

Z<br />

A<br />

C<br />

Y<br />

13-173


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.3 Cylinder surface transformation<br />

13-174<br />

12.01<br />

1st data block for cylinder surface transformation:<br />

24100 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=512<br />

Definition of 1st transformation in cylinder surface channel<br />

24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[0]=3<br />

Channel axis of radial rotary axis (Z) for 1st transformation<br />

24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[1]=4<br />

Channel axis of rotary axis for 1st transformation<br />

24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[2]=1<br />

Channel axis of parallel rotary axis (X) for 1st transformation<br />

24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[3]=2<br />

Channel axis of special axis index [0] for 1st transformation<br />

24120 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[0]=1<br />

1st Channel axis (X) for 1st transformation<br />

24120 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[1]=4<br />

2nd Channel axis (Y) for 1st transformation<br />

24120 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1[2]=3<br />

3rd Channel axis (Z) for 1st transformation<br />

24800 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1=0<br />

Offset of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation<br />

24810 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1=1<br />

Sign of rotary axis for the 1st TRACYL transformation<br />

24820 $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1[n]=0<br />

Vector of basic tool for 1st TRACYL transformation<br />

2nd data block for cylinder surface transformation with slot side correction:<br />

24200 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2=513<br />

Definition of 2nd transformation in cylinder surface channel with<br />

slot side correction<br />

24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[0]=3<br />

Channel axis of radial rotary axis (Z) for 2nd transformation<br />

24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[1]=4<br />

Channel axis of rotary axis for 2nd transformation<br />

24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[2]=1<br />

Channel axis of parallel rotary axis (X) for 2nd transformation<br />

24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[3]=2<br />

Channel axis of special axis index [0] for 2nd transformation<br />

24220 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[0]=1<br />

1st Channel axis (X) for 2nd transformation<br />

24220 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[1]=4<br />

2nd channel axis (Y) for 2nd transformation<br />

24220 $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2[2]=3<br />

3rd channel axis (Z) for 2nd transformation<br />

24850 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_2=0<br />

Offset of rotary axis for 2nd TRACYL transformation<br />

24860 $MC_TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2=1<br />

Sign of rotary axis for the 2nd TRACYL transformation<br />

24870 $MC_TRACYL_BASE_TOOL[n]=0<br />

Vector of basic tool for 2nd TRACYL transformation<br />

Note<br />

MD 24100 must always be set to 512 in the 1st data set and MD 24200 to 513<br />

in the 2nd data set.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Enable cylinder<br />

surface transformation<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.3 Cylinder surface transformation<br />

The “Enable cylinder surface transformation” function is displayed on the Shop-<br />

Mill operator interface when display MD 9721 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_TRACYL<br />

is set to 1. The rotary axis involved in the cylinder surface transformation is displayed<br />

and programmed via display MD 9653 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_A_AXIS or<br />

9720 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_B_AXIS.<br />

13-175


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.4 Swivel heads and tables<br />

13.4 Swivel heads and tables<br />

Alarms<br />

13-176<br />

12.01<br />

Swivel heads and tables are employed to create or machine oblique surfaces.<br />

Display MD 9723 $MM_CMM_ENABLE_SWIVELLING_HEAD is set to enable<br />

the swiveling function.<br />

You must set up a swivel data set for every swivel head, swivel table or combination<br />

of both.<br />

You can define swivel data sets using softkey ”Swivel cycle” in the ”Start-up”<br />

operating area on the CNC-ISO operator interface. For further details, see:<br />

References: /PGZ/, Programming Guide Cycles.<br />

When the swivel head/table is set manually, alarms displaying the required angle<br />

are output:<br />

62180 Set both axes manually<br />

62181 Set one axis manually<br />

With a Hirth tooth system, the corresponding rotary axes can only assume certain<br />

positions (angle grid > 0). If the programming demands a position that deviates<br />

from the angle grid, the machine automatically sets the next closest position<br />

and outputs an alarm.<br />

112328 Angle adjusted to angle grid<br />

How the alarm must be acknowledged can be set in swivel cycle TOOLCARR.<br />

An alarm is output if the swivel head/table must be set to an angle outside the<br />

permissible angular range in order to machine the workpiece:<br />

61184 Machining not possible with current angle values<br />

The programmed machining operation cannot be performed with the existing<br />

swivel head/table.<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> generates one of the following alarms when you manually load/unload<br />

or replace swivel heads:<br />

112323 Unload swivel head<br />

112324 Load swivel head<br />

112325 Replace swivel head<br />

When swivel heads are loaded/unloaded or replaced, the swivel head cycle<br />

TOOLCARR is also called.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Swivel cycle<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.4 Swivel heads and tables<br />

Swivel cycle TOOLCARR.SPF is stored in the toolbox and must be adapted to<br />

meet special machine requirements:<br />

S PLC enable to open the safety door<br />

S Confirm that swivel head or table has been changed<br />

S Angular setting of the swivel head/table<br />

S Angular setting of the swivel head prior to tool change<br />

S Angular setting of the swivel head prior to swivel head change<br />

S Actions involved in adapting swivel plane due to Hirth tooth system<br />

S Swivel angle on start of program<br />

Note<br />

One of the functions of cycle E_SWIV_H in swivel cycle TOOLCARR is to set<br />

the angle of the swivel head prior to a tool change.<br />

The following parameters must be transferred:<br />

Swivel head number (stored in variable _TC1)<br />

Angle of 1st swivel axis<br />

Angle of 2nd swivel axis.<br />

Cycle E_SWIV_H must not be used in modes _M20 and _M31.<br />

13-177


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.5 Multiple clamping<br />

13.5 Multiple clamping<br />

13-178<br />

12.01<br />

The “Multiple clamping” function optimizes tool changes over several workpiece<br />

clampings. On the one hand, this reduces downtimes and, on the other, eliminates<br />

tool change times because a tool performs as many machining operations<br />

as possible in all clampings before the next tool change is initiated.<br />

You can either execute the same program several times in the clampings or you<br />

can select different programs.<br />

The “Multiple clamping with different programs” is a software option with Order<br />

No. 6FC5 463-0FA04-0AA0.<br />

The “Multiple clamping” function utilizes cycle CLAMP.SPF which is automatically<br />

loaded when <strong>ShopMill</strong> is installed.<br />

You can leave the cycle unchanged for flat clamping devices. In the case of<br />

rotating clamping devices, you must adapt the cycle to match the features of the<br />

machine so as to ensure that the next workpiece can be turned to the correct<br />

position while the current workpiece is being machined.<br />

You can find the required cycle in tools\cycles\d in the toolbox.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

13.6 ISO dialects<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.6 ISO dialects<br />

You can import, process and export ISO Dialect0-M programs (Fanuc0 milling).<br />

Please read the following description for further details:<br />

References: /FBFA/, Description of Functions ISO Dialects.<br />

13-179


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.7 Spindle control<br />

13.7 Spindle control<br />

13-180<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> spindle control has the following special features:<br />

12.01<br />

S MD 35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET, value 1 causes the NCK<br />

not to switched off the spindle at M2 or M30. In contrast, the <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC<br />

distinguishes between M2 and M30. The spindle is stopped in response to<br />

M30 or RESET, but not M2.<br />

One of the benefits of this functionality is that the spindle can be started at<br />

any time in manual mode (e.g. for scratching).<br />

S The keys “Spindle right”, “Spindle left” and “Spindle stop” triggers the Shop-<br />

Mill -PLC input signals DB82 DBX9.1 “spindle_start”, DB82 DBX9.4 “spindle_right”,<br />

DB82 DBX9.3 “spindle_left” and DB82 DBX9.2 “spindle_stop”.<br />

The <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program writes the following interface signals to the<br />

signal data block:<br />

DB3x.DBX30.0 Spindle Stop<br />

DB3x.DBX30.1 Spindle Start CW Rotation<br />

DB3x.DBX30.2 Spindle Start CCW Rotation<br />

The spindle can be started and stopped when the channel is in the Reset<br />

state (DB21.DBX35.7=1) or when the channel status is ”interrupted”<br />

(DB21.DBX35.6=1) and the program status is ”interrupted”<br />

(DB21.DBX35.3=1).<br />

Note<br />

If the spindle must be stopped when the program is running, then interface<br />

signal ”Feed Stop/Spindle Stop” must be set in the user PLC (DB3x.DBX4.3).<br />

The spindle control can be deactivated via interface signal DB82.DBX9.0.<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

13.8 Automatically generated programs<br />

CMM_SINGLE<br />

CMM_MDI<br />

INPUT_DATA_MM<br />

INPUT_DATA_IN<br />

REM_DATA<br />

E Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) - 12.01 Edition<br />

13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.8 Automatically generated programs<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> creates several programs automatically during operation.<br />

The program is created when a function is executed in the “Machine manual”<br />

operating area. The <strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC switches internally to the “Machine Auto”<br />

area, processes the “CMM_SINGLE” program and returns to the “Machine<br />

Manual” operating area.<br />

The G code records programmed under “MDI are saved in this program.<br />

The parameter values last entered in a mask are saved in this program, independent<br />

of the unit of measurement. (INPUT_DATA_MM = values with the unit<br />

“mm”; INPUT_DATA_IN = values with the unit “Inch”)<br />

The data to be retained after the machine is switched off are stored in this program.<br />

13-181


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.9 <strong>ShopMill</strong> Open (PCU 50)<br />

13.9 <strong>ShopMill</strong> Open (PCU 50)<br />

13.9.1 Basic menu bar<br />

Jump into application<br />

Return jump from<br />

application<br />

13-182<br />

12.01<br />

The difference between <strong>ShopMill</strong> Open and <strong>ShopMill</strong> Classic is that the Open<br />

variant has a basic menu bar or extended basic menu bar. It is not possible to<br />

change to the CNC ISO operator interface in <strong>ShopMill</strong> Open, but the HMI<br />

Advanced operating areas “Parameters” (without tool management and zero<br />

offsets), “Services”, “Diagnosis” and “Start-Up” are directly accessible via the<br />

extended horizontal softkey menu.<br />

Furthermore, you can integrate Windows applications via softkeys in the basic<br />

menu bar in <strong>ShopMill</strong> Open.<br />

You must install these Windows applications in the “OEM” directory and define<br />

them in file “Regie.ini”. For further details, see on the <strong>ShopMill</strong> CD-ROM:<br />

References: User’s Manual HMI Programming Package Part 1 (BN).<br />

There are various methods by which you can integrate Windows applications<br />

into the basic menu bar:<br />

Horizontal softkey 4, i.e. the Messages/Alarms operating area is replaced<br />

User-assignable softkeys 7 and 8<br />

User-assignable softkeys 1 to 8 in the extended horizontal softkey menu<br />

There are 3 methods by which you can jump from the Windows application to<br />

another operating area:<br />

Using the ”Menu Select” key on the operator panel, you can return to the<br />

basic menu bar and then select another operating area via a softkey.<br />

You can configure the keys “Position”, “Program”, “Offset”, “Program Manager”,<br />

“Alarm” and “Custom” on the operator panel to branch directly into another<br />

operating area or sub-menu.<br />

You can configure so-called ”PLC keys” to branch into another operating<br />

area or sub-menu.<br />

References: /IAM/, Installation & Start-Up Guide HMI, Expand the Operator<br />

Interface (BE1)<br />

Keywords “OP Hotkeys” and “PLC Keys”<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.10 Cycles/measuring cycles support in the G code editor<br />

13.10 Cycles/measuring cycles support in the G code editor<br />

You can integrate screenforms in the G code editor which will offer you assistance<br />

in programming drilling, milling, turning and measuring cycles. These cycles<br />

can then be recompiled automatically.<br />

You must create a link between the softkeys which call this cycles/measuring<br />

cycles support function and the configuring file of the support screens in file<br />

COMMON.COM (in the user cycles directory CUS.DIR):<br />

sc8493=aeditor.com ; Drilling (horizontal softkey 3)<br />

sc8494=aeditor.com ; Milling (horizontal softkey 4)<br />

sc8495=aeditor.com ; Turning (horizontal softkey 5)<br />

sc8402=aeditor.com ; Measuring of milling (horizontal softkey 2<br />

; on the extended softkey bar)<br />

sc8403=aeditor.com ; Measuring of turning (horizontal softkey 3<br />

; on the extended softkey bar)<br />

For further information, please see:<br />

References: /IAM/, Installation & Start-up Guide HMI,<br />

BE1 Expand the Operator Interface.<br />

13-183


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.11 User status display (PCU 50)<br />

13.11 User status display (PCU 50)<br />

User<br />

symbols<br />

HEADER.INI<br />

13-184<br />

12.01<br />

Machine states controlled via the PLC can be displayed as user symbols in the<br />

program status line.<br />

Fig. 13-3 Program status line<br />

Program status line<br />

You must activate display of these user symbols in display MD 9052<br />

SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STATE.<br />

The program path of the currently selected program is then displayed with the<br />

program name in the line below.<br />

16 display positions are defined in the program status line.<br />

User symbols must meet the following requirements:<br />

Colors: 16-color mode<br />

Size: OP010/OP010C/OP010S: 16 x 16 pixels<br />

OP015: 27 x 26 pixels (height x width)<br />

File name: 8 characters<br />

Format: BMP<br />

Add the user symbols for the OP010/OP010C/OP010S to archive file<br />

ICO_640.arj in directory C:\MMC0W32\BIN or, for the OP015, to archive file<br />

ICO_1024.arj.<br />

Enter the names of the user symbols in file C:\MMC0W32\BIN\HEADER.INI at<br />

identifiers UserIcons.<br />

[UserIcons]<br />

UI_0= , <br />

UI_0: Identifier<br />

Ikone_00.bmp: Name of user symbol<br />

Position: Display position (1 to 16)<br />

...<br />

UI_31= , <br />

USER_ICON_BASE = DBx.DBBy<br />

DBx.DBBy: User-defined signal for control of<br />

symbol selection<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.11 User status display (PCU 50)<br />

User symbols are addressed bit-serially, i.e. if bit n is set in signal DBx.DBBy,<br />

the user symbol is displayed with identifier UI_n.<br />

If the bit is reset by the PLC, the associated user symbol is deleted from the<br />

program status display.<br />

If several user symbols are assigned to the same position, the user symbol with<br />

the highest identifier number is displayed.<br />

Empty positions need not be specified.<br />

13-185


13 Miscellaneous<br />

13.12 OP hotkeys, PLC keys<br />

13.12 OP hotkeys, PLC keys<br />

OP hotkeys<br />

PLC keys<br />

13-186<br />

12.01<br />

You can configure the keys “Position”, “Program”, “Offset”, “Program Manager”,<br />

“Alarm” and “Custom” on the operator panel to branch to an operating area of<br />

your choice.<br />

You can configure so-called ”PLC keys” to branch to particular operating areas.<br />

For information about configuring, please see:<br />

References: /IAM/, Installation & Start-Up Guide HMI, Expand the<br />

Operator Interface (BE1)<br />

Keywords “OP hotkeys” and ”PLC keys”.<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


Abbreviations<br />

ASUB<br />

BP<br />

CCU<br />

COM<br />

CNC<br />

CPU<br />

DB<br />

DBB<br />

DBX<br />

DRAM<br />

FB<br />

FC<br />

GP<br />

GUD<br />

HPU<br />

HSK<br />

INC<br />

IS<br />

ISA<br />

Asynchronous SUBprogram<br />

Basic Program<br />

Compact Control Unit<br />

Communication<br />

Computer Numerical Control<br />

Central Processing Unit<br />

Data Block<br />

Data Block Byte<br />

Data Block bit<br />

Dynamic Random Access Memory<br />

Function Block<br />

Function Call on the PLC<br />

Basic program<br />

Global User Data<br />

Handheld Programming Unit<br />

Horizontal Softkey<br />

INCrement: incremental dimension<br />

Interface Signal<br />

Industry Standard Architecture<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

A<br />

A-187


A Abbreviations<br />

MCP<br />

MD<br />

MMC<br />

MPF<br />

MPI<br />

NC<br />

NCK<br />

NCU<br />

OB<br />

PC<br />

PCMCIA<br />

PG<br />

PLC<br />

RAM<br />

RS-232<br />

SD<br />

SK<br />

SPF<br />

SRAM<br />

T<br />

TC<br />

A-188<br />

Machine Control Panel<br />

Machine Data<br />

12.01<br />

Man Machine Communication: User interface of <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> systems for<br />

operator control, programming and simulation<br />

Main Program File: NC part program (main program)<br />

Multipoint Interface<br />

Numerical Control<br />

Numerical Control Kernel (kernel with block preparation, traversing range, etc.)<br />

Numerical Control Unit: NC module<br />

Organization Block on the PLC<br />

Personal Computer<br />

Personal Computer Memory Card International Association<br />

Programming unit<br />

Programmable Logic Controller<br />

Random Access Memory in which data can be read and written<br />

Serial interface<br />

(definition of interchange circuit between DTE and DCE)<br />

Setting Data<br />

Soft Key<br />

SubProgram File<br />

Static Random Access Memory (buffered)<br />

Tool<br />

Tool Change<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

TO<br />

TOOLMAN<br />

WO<br />

Tool Offset<br />

Tool Management<br />

Work Offset<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

A Abbreviations<br />

<br />

A-189


A Abbreviations<br />

A-190<br />

Notes<br />

12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


References<br />

General Documentation<br />

/BU/<br />

/ST7/<br />

/Z/<br />

Electronic Documentation<br />

/CD8/<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong>/802S, C, D<br />

Ordering information<br />

Catalog NC 60<br />

Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A9-7600<br />

SIMATIC<br />

SIMATIC S7 Programmable Logic Control<br />

Catalog ST 70<br />

Order No.: E86 060-K4670-A111-A3<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong>, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE<br />

Cables & Connections & System Components<br />

Catalog NC Z<br />

Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-A8-7600<br />

The <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> System (01.02 Edition)<br />

DOC ON CD<br />

(with all the <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong>/802 and SIMODRIVE publications)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6CA00-0BG2<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

B<br />

B-191


B References<br />

User Documentation<br />

/AUK/<br />

/AUP/<br />

/BA/<br />

/BAD/<br />

/BEM/<br />

/BAE/<br />

/BAH/<br />

/BAK/<br />

/BAM/<br />

/BAS/<br />

B-192<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

AutoTurn Operator Action Short Guide (11.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA30-0BP3<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (11.01 Edition)<br />

Programming/setup<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA40-0BP3<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

MMC Operator’s Guide (10.00 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA00-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

HMI Advanced Operator’s Guide (11.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AF00-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

HMI Embedded Operator’s Guide (11.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC00-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Unit Operator Panel Operator’s Guide (04.96 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-3AA60-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

HT 6 Operator’s Guide (HPU New) (11.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-0AD60-0BP2<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Operator Action Short Guide (02.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA10-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

ManualTurn Operator’s Guide (08.00 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD00-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> Operator’s Guide (10.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD10-0BP0<br />

12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

/BAP/<br />

/BAT/<br />

/BNM/<br />

/DA/<br />

/KAM/<br />

/KAS/<br />

/KAT/<br />

/PG/<br />

/PGA/<br />

/PGK/<br />

/PGM/<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Handheld Programming Unit Operator’s Guide (04.00 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD20-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

ShopTurn Operator’s Guide (03.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Measuring Cycles User’s Guide (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA70-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Diagnostics Guide (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA20-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

ManualTurn Short Guide (04.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD40-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> Short Guide (04.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD30-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

ShopTurn Short Guide (07.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AF20-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Fundamentals Programming Guide (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB00-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Job Planning Programming Guide (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB10-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Programming Short Guide (02.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB30-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Programming Guide ISO Milling (10.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC20-0BP1<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

B References<br />

B-193


B References<br />

/PGT/<br />

/PGZ/<br />

/PI /<br />

/SYI/<br />

B-194<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Programming Guide ISO Turning (10.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC10-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Cycles Programming Guide (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB40-0BP1<br />

PCIN 4.4<br />

Software for data transfer to and from the MMC module<br />

Order No.: 6FX2 060 4AA00-4XB0 (Ger., Eng., Fr.)<br />

Order from: Fürth plant<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>i<br />

System Overview (02.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AE40-0BP0<br />

Manufacturer/Service Documentation<br />

a) Lists<br />

/LIS/<br />

b) Hardware<br />

/BH/<br />

/BHA/<br />

/EMV/<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

SIMODRIVE 611D<br />

Reports (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB70-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Operator Component Manual (hardware) (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP1<br />

SIMODRIVE Sensor<br />

Absolute Encoder with Profibus-DP<br />

User’s Guide (hardware) (02.99 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB10-0YP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong>, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE<br />

EMC Installation Guideline<br />

Planning Guide (hardware) (06.99 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AD30-0BP1<br />

12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

/PHC/<br />

/PHD/<br />

/PHF/<br />

/PMH/<br />

c) Software<br />

/FB1/<br />

/FB2/<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong><br />

Configuration Manual (hardware) (10.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AD10-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong><br />

Configuration Manual NCU 561.2-573.2 (hardware) (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC10-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> FM-NC<br />

Configuration Manual NCU 570 (hardware) (04.96 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AC00-0BP0<br />

SIMODRIVE Sensor<br />

Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives<br />

Configuration/Installation Guide, SIMAG-H (hardware) (05.99 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Basic Machine Description of Functions (Part 1) – (09.01 Edition) –<br />

(the books contained therein are listed below)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC20-0BP1<br />

A2 Various interface signals<br />

A3 Axis monitoring, protection zones<br />

B1 Continuous-path mode, exact stop and look ahead<br />

B2 Acceleration<br />

D1 Diagnostic tool<br />

D2 Interactive programming<br />

F1 Travel to fixed stop<br />

G2 Speeds, setpoint/actual value systems, closed-loop control<br />

H2 Auxiliary function output at the PLC<br />

K1 Mode group, channel, program operation<br />

K2 Axes, coordinate systems, frames,<br />

actual-value system for workpiece, external zero offset<br />

K4 Communication<br />

N2 EMERGENCY STOP<br />

P1 Transverse axes<br />

P3 Basic PLC program<br />

R1 Reference point approach<br />

S1 Spindles<br />

V1 Feed rates<br />

W1 Tool compensation<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong>(CCU2)<br />

Description of Extended Functions (Part 2) –(09.01 Edition)–<br />

including FM NC: Turning, stepper motor<br />

(the books contained therein are listed below)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC30-0BP1<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

B References<br />

B-195


B References<br />

/FB3/<br />

/FBA/<br />

B-196<br />

A4 Digital and analog NCK I/Os<br />

B3 Various operator panels and NCUs<br />

B4 Operator action via PG/PC<br />

F3 Remote diagnosis<br />

H1 Manual travel and handwheel travel<br />

K3 Compensation<br />

K5 Mode groups, channels, axis replacement<br />

L1 FM NC local bus<br />

M1 Kinematic transformation<br />

M5 Measuring<br />

N3 Software cam(s), limit signals<br />

N4 Punching and nibbling<br />

P2 Positioning axes<br />

P5 Reciprocation<br />

R2 Axes of rotation<br />

S3 Synchronous spindle<br />

S5 Synchronized actions (up to SW 3)<br />

S6 Stepper motor control<br />

S7 Memory configuration<br />

T1 Indexing axes<br />

W3 Tool change<br />

W4 Grinding<br />

12.01<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong>(CCU2)<br />

Basic Machine Description of Functions (Part 3) – (09.01 Edition) –<br />

(the books contained therein are listed below)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC80-0BP1<br />

F2 3 to 5-axis transformation<br />

G1 Gantry axes<br />

G3 Cycle times<br />

K6 Contour tunnel monitoring<br />

M3 Coupled axes and ESR<br />

S8 Constant tool speed for centerless grinding<br />

T3 Tangential control<br />

TE1 Clearance control<br />

TE2 Analog axis<br />

TE3 Speed/torque linking, master/slave<br />

TE4 Handling transformation package<br />

TE5 Setpoint exchange<br />

TE6 MCS coupling<br />

TE7 Retrace support<br />

TE8 Cycle-independent path-synchronized switching signal output<br />

V2 Preprocessing<br />

W5 3D tool radius compensation<br />

SIMODRIVE 611D/<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Description of Drive Functions<br />

(the chapters included therein are listed below)<br />

Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA80-0BP7<br />

(09.01 Edition)<br />

DB1 Event messages/alarm responses<br />

DD1 Diagnostic functions<br />

DD2 Speed control loop<br />

DE1 Enhanced drive functions<br />

DF1 Enabling<br />

DG1 Encoder parameterization<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

/FBAN/<br />

/FBD/<br />

/FBDN/<br />

/FBDT/<br />

/FBFA/<br />

/FBFE/<br />

/FBHLA/<br />

/FBMA/<br />

DL1 Linear motor MD<br />

DM1 Calculating motor/power section parameters and controller data<br />

DS1 Current control loop<br />

DÜ1 Monitoring/limitations<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/SIMODRIVE 611 digital<br />

Description of Functions<br />

ANA Module (02.00 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB80-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong><br />

Description of Functions Digitizing<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AC50-0BP0<br />

(07.99 Edition)<br />

DI1 Installation and Startup<br />

DI2 Scanning by tactile sensor (scancad scan)<br />

DI3 Scanning by laser (scancad laser)<br />

DI4 Creating a milling program (scancad mill)<br />

IT Solutions<br />

NC data management server (DNC NT-2000) (05.00 Edition)<br />

Description of functions<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE50-0BP1<br />

IT Solutions<br />

NC data transmission (SinDNC) (03.01 Edition)<br />

Description of functions<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-1AE70-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Description of Functions<br />

ISO Dialect for <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE10-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AF00-0BP1<br />

FE1 Remote diagnosis<br />

FE2 Interrupt-driven notification by e-mail: @Event<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/SIMODRIVE 611 digital<br />

Description of Functions<br />

HLA Module (04.00 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB60-0BP2<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Description of Functions ManualTurn (08.00 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD50-0BP1<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

B References<br />

B-197


B References<br />

/FBO/<br />

/FBP/<br />

/FBR/<br />

/FBSI/<br />

/FBSP/<br />

/FBST/<br />

/FBT/<br />

/FBSY/<br />

B-198<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Description of functions<br />

Configuration User Interface OP 030 (09.01 Edition)<br />

(the chapters contained therein are listed below)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC40-0BP0<br />

BA Operator guide<br />

EU Development environment (configuring package)<br />

PS online only: Configuring syntax (configuring package)<br />

PSE Introduction to configuring the user interface<br />

IK Screen kit: Software update and configuration<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong><br />

Description of Functions C PLC Programming (03.96 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB60-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

IT solutions<br />

Computer link (SinCOM) (04.00 Edition)<br />

Description of functions<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AD60-0BP0<br />

NFL Interface to the host computer<br />

NPL Interface to PLC/NCK<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong> / SIMODRIVE 611 digital<br />

Description of Functions <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> Safety Integrated (03.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB80-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (10.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP0<br />

SIMATIC (01.01 Edition)<br />

FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP<br />

Description of Functions<br />

Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA70-0YP4<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Description of Functions ShopTurn (03.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD70-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong>(CCU2)<br />

Description of Functions Synchronized Actions (09.01 Edition)<br />

for wood, glass, ceramics, presses<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD40-0BP1<br />

12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

/FBTD/<br />

/FBU/<br />

/FBW/<br />

/HBI/<br />

/PJE/<br />

/PJFE/<br />

/PJLM/<br />

/PJM/<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

IT solutions<br />

Tool Data Information System (SinTDI) with online Help (03.01 Edition)<br />

Description of functions<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE00-0BP0<br />

SIMODRIVE 611 universal<br />

Description of Functions (08.01 Edition)<br />

Control Components for Closed-Loop Speed Control and Positioning<br />

Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB20-0BP4<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Description of Functions Tool Management (10.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC60-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>i<br />

Manual (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE60-0BP0<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Configuring Package HMI Embedded (08.01 Edition)<br />

Description of Functions : Software Update, Configuration, Installation<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6EA10-0BP0<br />

(the publication PS Configuring Syntax is a component of the software consignment<br />

and is available as a pdf)<br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

Planning Guide Synchronous Integrated Motor 1FE1<br />

Three-Phase Motors for Main Spindle Drives (09.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC00-0BP1<br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

Planning Guide Linear Motors (06.01 Edition)<br />

(on request)<br />

ALL General information on the linear motor<br />

1FN1 Three-phase linear motor 1FN1<br />

1FN3 Three-phase linear motor 1FN3<br />

CON Cables & Connections<br />

Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB70-0BP2<br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

Planning Guide Motors<br />

Three-phase A.C. motors for feed and<br />

main spindle drives (09.00 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA20-0BP4<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

B References<br />

B-199


B References<br />

/PJU/<br />

/POS1/<br />

/POS2/<br />

/POS3/<br />

/S7H/<br />

/S7HT/<br />

/S7HR/<br />

/S7S/<br />

/S7L/<br />

/S7M/<br />

/SP/<br />

B-200<br />

SIMODRIVE 611<br />

Planning Guide Converters (05.01 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA00-0BP5<br />

SIMODRIVE POSMO A (08.01 Edition)<br />

Decentralized Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP, User’s Guide<br />

Order No.: 6SN2197-0AA00-0BP3<br />

SIMODRIVE POSMO A (12.98 Edition)<br />

Installation Guide (included with every POSMO A)<br />

Order No.: 462 008 0815 00<br />

SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA (08.01 Edition)<br />

Decentralized Servo Drive Technology, User’s Guide<br />

Order No.: 6SN2197-0AA20-0BP1<br />

SIMATIC S7 300 (10.98 Edition)<br />

– Manual: Constructing, CPU Data (Hardware Description)<br />

– Reference Manual: Module Data<br />

Order No.: 6ES7 398-8AA03-8AA0<br />

SIMATIC S7 300 (03.97 Edition)<br />

Manual: STEP 7, Basic Knowledge, V. 3.1<br />

Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AA0<br />

SIMATIC S7 300 (03.97 Edition)<br />

Manual: STEP 7, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1<br />

Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8AR0<br />

SIMATIC S7 300 (04.97 Edition)<br />

Positioning Module FM 353 for Stepper Drive<br />

Order together with the configuring package<br />

SIMATIC S7 300 (04.97 Edition)<br />

Positioning Module FM 354 for Servo Drive<br />

Order together with the configuring package<br />

SIMATIC S7 300 (01.01 Edition)<br />

Multi-Axis Module FM 357.2 for Servo and Stepper Drives<br />

Order together with the configuring package<br />

SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D,<br />

SimoPro 3.1<br />

Program for Configuring Machine Tool Drives<br />

Order No.: 6SC6 111-6PC00-0AA<br />

Order from: Fürth plant<br />

12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


12.01<br />

d) Installation and<br />

start-up<br />

/IAA/<br />

/IAC/<br />

/IAD/<br />

/IAF/<br />

/IAM/<br />

SIMODRIVE 611A<br />

Installation & Start-Up Guide (10.00 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6SN 1197-0AA60-0BP6<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>810D</strong><br />

Installation & Start-Up Guide (10.01 Edition)<br />

(incl. description of the commissioning software SIMODRIVE<br />

611D)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AD20-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/SIMODRIVE 611D<br />

Installation & Start-Up Guide (09.01 Edition)<br />

(incl. description of the commissioning software SIMODRIVE<br />

611D)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB10-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> FM-NC<br />

Installation & Start-Up Guide (07.00 Edition)<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB00-0BP1<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong><br />

HMI/MMC Installation & Start-Up Guide<br />

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP1<br />

(11.01 Edition)<br />

AE1 Updates/options<br />

BE1 Supplementing the user interface<br />

HE1 Online Help<br />

IM2 Installation & Start-Up HMI Embedded<br />

IM4 Installation & Start-Up HMI Advanced<br />

TX1 Creating foreign language texts<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

B References<br />

B-201


B References<br />

B-202<br />

Notes<br />

12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


Index<br />

A<br />

Access protection, 12-161<br />

Access protection features, 12-162<br />

Access rights, 12-161<br />

Access softkeys, 13-169<br />

Application disks, 2-18<br />

installing on PC card, 2-20<br />

installing on PC/PG, 2-19<br />

B<br />

Basic components, 1-13<br />

C<br />

CLAMP.SPF, 13-178<br />

Configuration file, 9-112<br />

examples, 9-112<br />

variables, 9-115<br />

Coolant, 8-93<br />

Customer booting display, 13-167<br />

Cycles, user-configured, 13-169<br />

Cycles support, 13-183<br />

Cylinder surface transformation, 13-172<br />

axis configuration, 13-173<br />

groove wall offset, 13-172<br />

D<br />

Data blocks, 4-40<br />

DB71, 9-123<br />

DB72, 9-125<br />

DB82, 4-42<br />

Default password, 12-163<br />

Diagnostic buffer signals, 5-49, 5-67<br />

Diagnostics function for NC signals, 4-44<br />

Display machine data, 6-74<br />

F<br />

FB110, 9-121<br />

FC100, 9-121<br />

FC30...35, 4-41<br />

FC90, 4-41<br />

Function blocks, 4-39<br />

Functions, tool–specific, 8-89<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition<br />

H<br />

Hardware<br />

assembly, 1-13<br />

basic components, 1-13<br />

operator components, 1-13<br />

system assembly, 1-13<br />

HEADER.INI, 13-184<br />

I<br />

Initial start-up, 2-19<br />

Input signals, 5-47<br />

Interface DB82, 4-42<br />

Interface signals, 5-47<br />

Interface signals for <strong>ShopMill</strong>, 4-45<br />

Interlocking logic, 4-43<br />

ISO dialects, 13-179<br />

K<br />

Keyswitch, 12-164<br />

L<br />

Lockable data areas, 12-165<br />

M<br />

M functions, 8-94<br />

Machine control panel, 1-15<br />

MCP 19”, 1-15<br />

OP032S, 1-16<br />

Machine Data, 6-69<br />

Machine data<br />

display, 6-72<br />

measuring cycles, 10-151<br />

NC, 6-69<br />

Manual tools, 8-92<br />

Measuring cycles, 10-143<br />

display machine data, 10-152<br />

functional check, 10-146<br />

I/O interface, 10-145<br />

probe machine data, 10-151<br />

Multiple clamping, 13-178<br />

C<br />

C-203


C Index<br />

N<br />

NC machine data<br />

exact value assignment, 6-69<br />

mnimum value assignment, 6-69<br />

variable value assignment, 6-69<br />

Network, 11-157<br />

Network drive, linking, 11-158<br />

O<br />

OB1, 4-36<br />

OB100, 4-38<br />

OP hotkeys, 13-186<br />

Operator components, 1-13<br />

Output signals, 5-48<br />

P<br />

Password, 12-163<br />

reset, 12-163<br />

set, 12-163<br />

PC card<br />

creating, 2-20<br />

loading, 2-21<br />

PLC<br />

diagnostic buffer signals, 5-49<br />

interface signals, 5-47<br />

program, 4-35<br />

program structure, 4-35<br />

sample calls, 4-36<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB 82, 5-47<br />

toolbox disks, 2-18<br />

PLC keys, 13-186<br />

Probe connection, 10-144<br />

Programs, generated automatically, 13-181<br />

Protection levels, 12-165<br />

R<br />

Reserved Functions, 7-87<br />

S<br />

Screen form, user-configured, 13-169<br />

Series start-up, 2-31<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong>, 4-42<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> Classic, 2-22<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> interface DB 82, 5-51<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> Open, 13-182<br />

C-204<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong> PLC program, 4-41<br />

Software installation<br />

application disks, 2-18<br />

system disks, 2-18<br />

Software start-up, 2-17<br />

data communication, 2-17<br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong>, 2-17<br />

Spindle, 8-93<br />

Spindle control, 13-180<br />

Start-up<br />

initial, 2-19<br />

measuring cycles, 10-148<br />

NC, 2-27<br />

PLC, 2-29<br />

series, 2-31<br />

software, 2-17<br />

Starting up<br />

PCU 20, 2-19<br />

PCU 50, 2-22<br />

Status display, 13-184<br />

Supplementary conditions, 3-33<br />

Swivel cycle, 13-177<br />

Swivel heads, 13-176<br />

Swivel tables, 13-176<br />

System disks, 2-18<br />

installing on PC/PG, 2-19<br />

T<br />

Texts, tool–specifc, 8-96<br />

to_mill.ini, 9-136<br />

Tool change, adapting, 8-90<br />

Tool Changes, 8-89<br />

Tool list, coolant and direction of rotation, 8-93<br />

Tool management, 9-101<br />

blocks, 9-121<br />

configuring the operator interface, 9-136<br />

display machine data, 9-118<br />

examples, 9-130<br />

NC machine data, 9-105<br />

NC start-up, 9-104<br />

overview of functions, 9-101<br />

PLC start-up, 9-119<br />

Tool–changing cycle, 8-90<br />

Tool-specific functions, 8-94<br />

Toolbox disks, 2-18<br />

TRACYL, 13-172<br />

U<br />

User screenform, 13-169<br />

User status display, 13-184<br />

12.01<br />

Siemens AG, 2001. All rights reserved<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong> Description of Functions <strong>ShopMill</strong> (FBSP) – 12.01 Edition


SIEMENS AG<br />

A&D M C BMS<br />

P.O. Box 3180<br />

D -91050 Erlangen (Germany)<br />

(Tel. 0180 / 5050 -- 222 [Hotline]<br />

Fax +49 (0) 9131/98 --2176<br />

email: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de)<br />

From<br />

Name<br />

Company/Department<br />

Address<br />

Telephone: /<br />

Telefax: /<br />

Suggestions and/or corrections<br />

Suggestions<br />

Corrections<br />

For Publication/Manual:<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

<strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

Manufacturer/Service Documentation<br />

Description of Functions<br />

Order No.: 6FC5297-6AD80-0BP0<br />

Edition: 12.01<br />

Sould you come across any printing errors<br />

when reading this publication, please notify us<br />

on this sheet.<br />

Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.


<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Documentation overview <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> <strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<strong>810D</strong> (09.01)<br />

General Documentation<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

Sales brochure Catalog<br />

Ordering NC 60 *)<br />

User Documentation<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

Operator<br />

components<br />

(hardware) *)<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

Function. desc.<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

Safety Integrated<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

611, motors<br />

DOCONCD*)<br />

The <strong>SINUMERIK</strong> system<br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong>/<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

611D<br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

Drive function *)<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

Digitizing<br />

Electronic Documentation<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

SIROTEC<br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

Accessories<br />

Catalog<br />

of accessories<br />

NC-Z<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>i<br />

Programming Guide Operator’s Guide System overview<br />

-- Short Guide<br />

-- ManualTurn<br />

-- Fundamentals *) -- Short Guide ManualTurn<br />

-- Production Planning *) -- <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

-- Cycles<br />

- Short Guide <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

-- Measuring cycles -- Shop Turn<br />

-- ISO Turning/Milling --Short Guide Shop Turn<br />

Manufacturer/Service Documentation<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

-- Basic machine *)<br />

-- Expansion funct.<br />

-- Special functions<br />

Manufacturer/Service Documentation<br />

*) Recommended minimum documentation requirement<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

Installation and<br />

Start-up Guide *)<br />

-- FM NC<br />

-- <strong>810D</strong><br />

-- <strong>840D</strong>/611D<br />

-- MMC/HMI<br />

User Documentation<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong>/<br />

FM NC<br />

AutoTurn<br />

- Short Guide<br />

- Programming (1)<br />

- Setup (2)<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

-- ManualTurn<br />

-- <strong>ShopMill</strong><br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Configuring Pack<br />

MMC100/101<br />

-- Configuring syntax<br />

-- Development env.<br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

611D<br />

Lists*)<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Operator’s Guide<br />

-- HT 6 (+ <strong>840D</strong>i)<br />

- HPU<br />

-- Unit control panel<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

Synchronized<br />

actions<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Installation Pack<br />

MMC100/101<br />

SW update and<br />

configuration<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

Diagnostics<br />

Guide *)<br />

Manufacturer/Service Documentation<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

<strong>840D</strong><br />

611D<br />

Function. desc.<br />

Linear motor<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

- Computer link<br />

- Tool Dat a<br />

Information System<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

Tool management<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

<strong>840D</strong><br />

611D<br />

Manufacturer/Service Documentation<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

ISO dialects for<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>i<br />

Manual<br />

(hardware +<br />

installation<br />

and start-up)<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>840D</strong>i/<br />

<strong>810D</strong><br />

Operator’s Guide *)<br />

-- Short Guide<br />

-- BA MMC103<br />

-- BA HMI Embedded<br />

-- BA HMI Advanced<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

Configuration<br />

(hardware) *)<br />

-- FM NC<br />

-- <strong>810D</strong><br />

-- <strong>840D</strong><br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

Config. user<br />

interface OP 030<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

SIMODRIVE<br />

SIROTEC<br />

Function. desc. EMC Guidelines<br />

- Hydraulics module<br />

- Analog module<br />

<strong>SINUMERIK</strong><br />

<strong>840D</strong>/<strong>810D</strong><br />

Function. desc.<br />

Remote diagnosis

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!